IMD 1.18: 21/01/2023 18:36:15
PRQ-SFT-SND-6
3RCC PERQ OPERATING SYSTEM SOURCE DISTRIBUTION FLOPPY
Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1982
single density, double sided   D.6
Group name                  Command file
OS.SYSTEM.SOURCE
OS.PROGRAMS.SOURCE         SRC.CMD
OS.IO.SOURCE
   	
for XSPutChr
                                          Add new procedure for window change
                                                                number of chars printed on line to
                                           255;
  Version  3.0          to full size.
                                          Fixed bug when ask for current window
                        18-feb-81  Brad A. Myers  Added Window relative RasterOp and
                                           Line routines; change                       size.
                                          Fixed bug in SSetSize.
  Version  3.8  23-May-81  John d windows to
                                           be a list rather that record;
                                        P. Strait Use IOKeyDisable in ChangeTitle.
  Version  3.7  13-May-81  Brad A. Myers  Added new exceptions
  Version  3.6  17-M   changed module name; added extra
                                           scan line to title and margin below;
          ar-81  Brad A. Myers  Changed SClearChar and SBackSpace to
                                           take a char; made name co                                 changed to separate CR-LF
  Version  2.2   9-Feb-81  Brad A. Myers  fixed broken screen size; mpatible
  Version  3.5   3-Mar-81  Brad A. Myers  Removed BS special char and added
                                         make screen
                                           export SScreenP and SScreenW
  Version  2.1  14-Jan-81  Brad A. Myers    SBackSpace and SClearChar procedures
                                           Removed SRasterOp
                          fixed cursor bug
  Version  1.0   1-Jul-80  Miles A. Barel started
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{----------------------------------------------------------------
   Change Log:

                 and SLine and SIsCurOn; SCursorOn
                                           vble exported
  Version  3.4  24  Version  3.12 20-Jan-82  Brad A. Myers  Fix title line to quote characters
                                          Fixed cu-feb-81  Brad A. Myers  Added return param to GetWindowParms
                                           to tell HasTitle;
  VersorOutside exception from
                                              ChangeTitle after SSetSize.
                         rsion  3.3  24-feb-81  Brad A. Myers  Added param to SSetSize to leave
                                           screen displa                 Fixed SBackSpace comment.
  Version  3.11 13-Aug-81  Brad A. Myers  Raise an exception if SSetCursor
        yed
  Version  3.2  20-feb-81  Brad A. Myers  Changed to have a fixed number of
                                           win                                    outside a window
  Version  3.10 26-Jun-81  Brad A. Myers  Export the Window Table
  Versidows; added refresh command and
                                           SIsCurOn; fixed dot in lower-right
                on  3.9  26-Jun-81  Brad A. Myers  Export all internal procedures
                                             used by SPutChr                            corner
  Version  3.1  19-feb-81  Brad A. Myers  BS to previous line added; restrict
                 	
                             º     
	0 ,<^;d   
	È 	@~;d   
	 ¯x;d   
	0	 Ì:d;d
   
	 @;d   
	x	 &ß;d   
	P {7F ;d"   
	  öQ;d   
	X 
      
	h h"/";d4   
	 #Ô!   
	À #Ô!;d	   
	x ô&k;d   
	X ô&å;d   
	( ô&é  	
                       NOTE: There are still bugs in VarWin true}

Type
        FontPtr = ^Font;
        Font = Packed Recorifc VarWin then}
                       winNext: WindowP;
{$endc}
                       end;
{$ifc VarWin then}
Const   Mad    { Contains character sets }
                Height:integer; { Height of the KSet }
                Base: integer;  { distxWIndx = 32767;
{$elsec}
Const   MaxWIndx = 17;
{$endc}

Type    WinRange = 0..MaxWIndx;        
        LineStyle = (Drawance from top of characters to base-line }
                Index: Array [0..#177] of { Index into character patterns }
       Line,EraseLine,XorLine);

        LS = String[255];
        
Procedure ScreenInit;           { CALL THIS ONCE AT BOOT }
Pro             Packed Record case boolean of
                      true: (Offset: 0..767; { position of character in patterns }
cedure ScreenReset;          { This procedure de-allocates storage for
                                  all windows and sets u                        Line: 0..63;    { Line of patterns containing char }
                        Width: integer); { Width op the default window. }
Procedure SPutChr(CH:char);     { put character CH out to current position }
                         f the character }
                       false:(Loc:integer; Widd: integer)
                    end;
                Filler:        { on the screen.  Chars FF, CR, and LF }
                                { have special meanings unless #200 bit set: }array[0..1] of integer;
                Pat: Array [0..0] of integer;  { patterns go here }
                                  
                                {       FF - clear screen               
                                {       CR - move lef      { We turn off range checking to }
                                        { access patterns, hence allowing }
          t to margine
                                {       LF - move vertically down one 
                                {       BS                              { KSets of different sizes }
            end;
{$ifc VarWin then}
      WindowP = ^WindowType;
 - erase previous character   }
Procedure SSetCursor(X,Y: integer);     { Set Cursor Position to X,Y }
Procedure SReadCursor(v{$endc}
      WindowType = Packed Record
{$ifc VarWin then}
                       winNumber: Integer;  {this window number}ar X,Y: integer);{ Read Cursor Position }
Procedure SCurOn;                       { Enable display of Cursor }
Procedure SCurO-----}

Exports

Imports Raster from Raster;

Const   ScreenVersion = 'V3.12';
        VarWin = false;  {if true then ca
{$endc}
                       winBY, winTY, winLX, winRX,   { Limits of window area }
                       winHX, winHY, wn have an arbitrary number of windows
                          and storage for them has to be allocated off a heap.
         inMX, winMY,   { Limits of useable area }
                       winCurX, winCurY, winFunc: integer;
                       wi                 If false then there are 17 windows max, and
                          storage is in screens global data. 
   nKSet: FontPtr;
                       winCrsChr: char;
                       winHasTitle, winCursorOn, defined: boolean;
{$   	
;d   
	8 ”Tz~;d   
	  ;dfM;d   
	0 ÚdLm;d   
	( 	f€};d   
	8  hfÌ;d   
	¸ hfÀ…;d   
	@ hfÃ…;d   
	( ßfô& ;d   
	 ¶pe;d   
	ð »pÚ};d   
	H  q     
	° Iq©;d   
	˜ IqÚ;d   
	 IqL;d   
	À ˜sBÓ;d   
	Ø ÖsIq ;d   
	  Ös™’;d   
	 Jw ;d   
	° Jwa;d   
	P òyu;d%   
	Ð	 »zÕ};d   
	À  »zÎ;d   
	ˆ =†s;d   
	€ i†’M ;d   
	ð ô&Q";d   
	x ô&y";d   
	0
 ô&œ";d   
	x œ,u~;d   
	 	 I.€;d   
	( ˜:  ;d   
	 :]s;d   
	¸ :_s;d   
	` úŠI€;d
   
	è TŒ     
	@ ™’Ú};d   
	  “y  Ì   Š	€ ;dIq;d   j	X xàL:d½   *
`  d¸¼Íó  3 Í ó   ;d   
	ˆ ¡:üX;d   
	 §:E~;d   
	x ¨:þq;d(   
	° ­:üX;d   
	¸ oL35;d   
	è YMÚ;d   
	H
 R©`;d#   
	˜ ®SM! ;d   
	8 ”Tz~;d   
	  ;dfM;d   
	0 ÚdLm;d   
	( 	f€};d   
	8  hfÌ;d   
	¸ hfÀ…;d   
	@ hfÃ…;d   
	( ßfô& ;d   
	 ¶pe;d   
	ð »pÚ};d   
	H  q     
	° Iq©;d   
	˜ IqÚ;d   
	 IqL;d   
	À ˜sBÓ;d   
	Ø ÖsIq ;d   
	  Ös™’;d   
	 Jw ;d   
	° Jwa;d   
	P òyu;d%   
	Ð	 »zÕ};d   
	À  »zÎ;d   
	ˆ =†s;d   
	€ i†’M ;d   
	` úŠI€;d
   
	è TŒ     
	@ ™’Ú};d   
	  “y  Ì   Š	€ ;dIq;d   j	X xàL:d½   *
`  d¸¼Íó  3 Í ó         * é¸~:d9   Š	Ø         Š	  	@~;d   
	 ¯x;d   
	0	 Ì:d;d
   
	 @;d   
	x	 &ß;d   
	P {7F ;d"   
	  öQ;d   
	X 
      
	h h"/";d4   
	 #Ô!   
	À #Ô!;d	   
	x ô&k;d   
	X ô&å;d   
	( ô&é ;d   
	ð ô&Q";d   
	x ô&y";d   
	0
 ô&œ";d   
	x œ,u~;d   
	 	 I.€;d   
	( ˜:  ;d   
	 :]s;d   
	¸ :_s ;d   
	ˆ ¡:üX;d   
	 §:E~;d   
	x ¨:þq;d(   
	° ­:üX;d   
	¸ oL35;d   
	è YMÚ;d   
	H
 R©`;d#   
	˜ ®SM!   	
ff;                      { Disable display of Cursor }
Procedure SCurChr(C: char);             { Set cursor character }
Proced----------
 Abstract: Raised if the lines parameter to SSetSize is not a multiple of
           128 or is <=0.  Also raised ifure SChrFunc(F: integer);         { Set raster-op function for SPutChr }
Procedure SSetSize(Lines: integer; complemented, scree a window is totally below area to
           release so will disappear then if window # 0 or is the current
           windownOff: Boolean);
                                        { Set Screen Size; lines must be a
                                   , then Raises WBadSize.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

Exception BadWNum;  {       multiple of 128; screenOff if true
                                          turns off display in part below lines
    indx is invalid}
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract: Raised if a window                                       in which case, complemented 
                                          describes off partnumber parameter is illegal (not defined or out
           of range.
--------------------------------------------------------- of screen }
Procedure CreateWindow(WIndx: WinRange;
                       OrgX, OrgY, Width, Height: integer; Title: string)--------------------}

Exception WTooBig;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Ab;
Procedure ChangeWindow(WIndx: WinRange);
Procedure GetWindowParms(var WIndx: WinRange;
          var OrgX, OrgY, Width, Heistract: Raised if parameters for new window specify an area that would
            extend off screen.
------------------------ght: integer; var hasTitle: Boolean);
Procedure ChangeTitle(Title: string);
Procedure SetFont(NewFont: FontPtr);
Function Get-----------------------------------------------------}

Procedure StartLine;
Procedure ToggleCursor;
Procedure NewLine;
ProFont: FontPtr;

Procedure SClearChar(c: Char; funct: Integer); {delete prev char}
                                       { c cedure SaveLineEnd(x: Integer);
Procedure SFullWindow;

Const SScreenW = 48;       {for use when want Screen in RasterOp or LBETTER NOT be CR or LF}
Procedure Line(Style: LineStyle; X1, Y1, X2, Y2: integer; Origin: RasterPtr);
Procedure SBackSpace(c: ine}
Var   SScreenP: RasterPtr; {for use when want Screen in RasterOp or Line}
      SCursorOn: boolean;
      SFunc: integerChar); {move back over last char of curLine}
                                       { c BETTER NOT be CR or LF}
Procedure Refr;      { Raster-op function for SPutChr }

{$ifc VarWin then}
      FirstWindp,             { first window's pointer; better eshWindow(WIndx: WinRange); {redraws window outline and title
                                            area. DOES NOT REDRAWnot be NIL }
      CurWindp: WindowP;      { current window's pointer }
{$elsec}
      CurWind: WinRange;
      WinTable: Ar TITLE}

Exception WBadSize; {parameter to SSetSize bad}
{-------------------------------------------------------------------ray[WinRange] of WindowType;
{$endc}

Exception CursOutSide;
{--------------------------------------------------------------   	
ack.  The general form of an ACB
{       is as follows.
{
{       +0   Static link - address of the ACB of the surrounding pr maximum E-stack }
        ACBLength    =  26;      { largest ACB }
                                                          ocedure.
{       +1   Local pointer - address of the current local variables.
{       +2   Dynamic link - address of the previ ous ACB on the stack.
{       +3   Global link - address of the previous routine's global data.
{       +4   Top link - addres s of the previous top-of-stack.
{       +5   Return segment - segment number of the previous procedure.
{       +6   Return ad dress - offset within the return segment.
{       +7   Return routine number - previous routine number.
{       +8   Exceptionmodule AllocDisk;
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------
{AllocDisk: Module to handle all pointer - pointer to list of exception enable blocks.
{       +9   E-Stack size - number of save words of expression stack.
{ocating and freeing of pages off disk
{Written by CMU-people
{Copyright (C) 1980 Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{
{
{Abs        +10..+n+9  E-stack image - previous expression stack.
{
{-------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------}


{ 14 Mar 81  1.1  J. P. Strait.
{ Add ACBEP for exceptions.
{ }

{ 21 Nov 80  1.0  J. P. Strait.
{ S tart file.
{ }

        ACBSL        =   0;      { static link }
        ACBLP        =   1;      { local pointer }
         ACBDL        =   2;      { dynamic link }
        ACBGL        =   3;      { global link }
        ACBTL        =   4;      { ACB Definitions.
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       ACB.Dfs - Activat{ top link }
        ACBRS        =   5;      { return segment }
        ACBRA        =   6;      { return address }
        ion control block definitions.
{       J. P. Strait   21 Nov 80.
{       Copyright (c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980ACBRR        =   7;      { return routine number }
        ACBEP        =   8;      { exception pointer }
        ACBStackSize.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This file defines offsets within the Activation Control Blocks
{       (ACB's) in the Perq memory st =   9;      { E-stack size }
        ACBSaveStack =  10;      { saved E-stack }
        ACBReserve   =  26;      { ACB size +  	
 Myers  1-May-1981
 Copyright (C) 1981 Three Rivers Computer Corporation.
 
-------------------------------------------------1  V0.5   John P. Strait Change call to StreamKeyBoardReset.
    20-May-81  V0.4   Brad A. Myers  New stream reset procedure
 ----------------------------}

{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Versions:
                                       Compiler switch for run info at top
                                      Proceed command  
    11 Dec 81  V0.14  WJHansen       Change to set InCmdFile False instead
                                         of clos
    12-May-81  V0.3   Brad A. Myers  Use new IO modules; new exceptions
     6-May-81  V0.2   Brad A. Myers  No procedure name---------------
 Abstract: Raised if try to set the cursor outside of the current window.
 Resume:  Allowed.  If resume, then ing CmdFile
                      Brad A. Myers  enable keyboard at start of Scrounge
                      
     3 Dec-81  Vcursor is NOT moved (same effect as if
          signal is caught but not resumed).  
----------------------------------------0.13  Brad Myers     ChangeWindow(0).
                                     Help exception.
                                   -------------------------------------}


Private
                                                                            Command for showing exception parameters.
                                     Command to dereference pointers.
    26-Oct-8 1  V0.12  John P. Strait Change to agree with V2.11 Memory.
    30-Jun-81  V0.11  Brad A. Myers  Increase screen size for defau lt window
                                     Set ^S Pending to false
                                     Fix ^Shift-D while  ^Shift-D
                                     Remove n command (NIY anyway)
     5-Jun-81  V0.10  Brad A. Myers  Fixed ^C hanModule Scrounge;

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Title: PERQ Pascal Prelimindling
                                     More information when Scrounge aborts
     4-Jun-81  V0.9   Brad A. Myers  Catch FSary debugger.
 Abstract: This module contains the procedure Scrounge which allows a small
            amount of debugging.  SiNotFnd for lookups
                                     Clear IO buffer for CleanUp.
     1-Jun-81  V0.8   Brad A. Myers  Fixence there are no symbol tables or micro--
            code support for breakpoints, you can look at the stack trace and
      d bugs in recursive invocation.
    28-May-81  V0.7   Brad A. Myers  Made safer for recursive invocation.
                          examine vbles by offsets.  The types of the variables have to be
            specified by the user.
 Written by: Brad A.                 Add all handlers
    23-May-81  V0.6   John P. Strait Enable keyboard interrupts before reading.
    22-May-8   	
cluding its partion names, locations and sizes.
{ It also contains a table used to locate boot segments
{ 
{ A disk can be 'mNextAdr pointers are chased to find the
{ real end of the Free List.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------ounted' which means that its root partition is known
{ to the system as an entry in the DiskTable.
{ 
{ A Partition Informati---------------------}

{--------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Versions:
    V2.8   3on Block (PartInfoBlock or PIB) contains all of the
{ fixed information about a partition,
{ 
{ A partition can also be 'moun-Dec-81  Brad Myers   Changed definition of FlushFail
    V2.7  15-Jul-81  John Strait  Fixed bug in DeallocChain: increment
 ted', and this is usually done as part of
{ mounting the disk itself. Partitions mounted are entries in the PartTable
{   
{                                  PartNumOps by the length of the deallocated
                                  chain.  Change oWithin a partition, segments are allocated as doubly linked lists of pages
{ 
{ The Free List of a segment is a doubly linked rder of operations in
                                  AllocDisk routine to reduce probability
                              list of free pages
{
{ This module maintains this list, as well as the DeviceTable and PartTable
{ It contains procedures for    of creating an inconsistent free list.
    V2.6  23-Jun-81  Brad Myers  Changed UpdatePartInfo to only write PartInfo
     mounting and dismounting disks and partitions, 
{ as well as allocating and deallocating space within a partition.

{ When a                              if changed so can boot from write-protected
                                  floppies.
    V2.5llocating pages, the module updates the PartInfoBlock every
{ MaxAllocs calls on AllocDisk
{
{ Since the system may crash som   1-Jun-81  Brad Myers  Made UpdatePartInfo more fail-safe.
    V2.4  12-May-81  Brad Myers  New exceptions; no Write statemene time between updates, the pointers
{ and free list size may not be accurate.
{
{ When a partition is mounted, the pointers ts.
                                 Changed addresses to print in unsigned decimal
    V2.3  20-Apr-81  John Strait Use DiskStract:
{    Allocdisk allocates and deallocates disk pages.
{
{ The partition has some number of contiguous pages on it. 
{ are checked to see if they
{ point to free pages.  If not, the head of the pointer is found by
{ looking at the "filler" word The number of pages in a partition is specified
{ when the partition is created (using the Partition program).  
{ Segments caof the block the free head does point to
{ (which presumably was allocated after the last update of PartInfoBlock).
{ The filln be created within a partition, e.g. segments may not
{ span partitions.

{ The entire disk can be thought of as a partitioner word has a short pointer to the next "free" page, and forms
{ a linked list to the real free list header.  Likewise, if the  (the Root Partition)
{
{ A DiskInformationBlock (DiskInfoBlock or DIB) contains all the fixed
{ information about a disk, inFree tail
{ does not have a next pointer of 0, a deallocate is presumed to have been done
{ since a PartInfoBlock update, and   	
user programs, but rather the
{       compiler generates calls to these routines when a Reset,
{       Rewrite, Get, or Put is 1) Remove reverse video control character code.
                            2) Fixed bug in FullLn.
                          encountered.  Higher-level character
{       I/O functions (Read and Write) are implemented by the two
{       modules Reader   3) Made EofCh (^Z) echo at Console.
      
      V1.9  JPS   4 Jun 81  Add Virgil headers and comments.
      
      V1.8 and Writer.
{
{       In this module, the term "file buffer variable" refers to F^ for
{       a file variable F.
{
{-----  JPS  22 May 81  Make StreamKeyBoardReset accept a Text parameter.
      
      V1.7  BAM  19 May 81  StreamKeyBoardReset tur------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------------------------------------n cursor off.
      
      V1.6  JPS  12 May 81  Use exceptions instead of StreamError.
                            Fix bug w----------------------------
{     Change log:

      V1.20  BAM  27 Jan 82  Turn RSX back on.

      V1.19a SLB  26 Jan 82hen EofCh is typed at console.
                            Use new control-C exceptions.
      
      V1.5  BAM  19 Mar 81  P  Add exception definition NotReal.

      V1.18 SLB  07 Jan 82  Add exception definition RealWriteError.

      V1.17 SLB  ERQ_String
      
      V1.4  BAM  17 Mar 81  1) Change to use FSIsFSDev on open
                            2) Change to uses for system modules
                                       until debug since takes too long
     1-May-81  V0.1   Brad A. Mye30 Dec 81  Add an exception definition LargeReal, and change
                            exception definition SmallNumber to Smrs  Started by reworking PMD
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{////////////allReal.
                                  
      V1.16 BAM  17 Dec 81  Turn off RSX switch.
                            Make////////////} EXPORTS {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

Procedure Scrounge(ES, ER, PStart, PEnd, ExcSeg, RaiseAP: Integer); regular OOPs work.
      
      V1.15 SLB  24 Nov 81  Add an exception definition SmallNumber.
      
      V1.14 JPS  25 S

{////////////////////////} PRIVATE {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}
                                                      ep 81  Fix bug in control-BS for keyboard input.
      
      V1.13 JPS  27 Jul 81  1) Export the keyboard buffer variables.
module Stream;


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Stream - Perq Pas                            2) Change line editing to be like the Editor.
                            3) Make Readln work for fcal stream package.
{       John Strait              ca. Jan 80.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980iles with no Eol before
                               the Eof.

      V1.12 BAM   6 Jul 81  Check for IOECBF as well as IOEI.
{
{
{ Abstract:
{       This module implements the low-level Pascal I/O.  It is not
{       intended for use directly by OB in RS: output

      V1.11 BAM   1 Jul 81  Changed IO Screen output device name to ScreenOut

      V1.10 JPS  24 Jun 81    	
       "root partition" in display partitions
                                 ForgetAll at end DeviceDismount
    V2.1  27-Maone since
                                              last update of PartInfoBlock}
                    PartNumFree  : FSBitr-81  Brad Myers  Fixed bug in FindPartition for missing device
                                  and added comments
    V2.0 32;  {HINT of how many free pages}
                    PartInUse    : boolean;  {this entry in PartTable is valid}
            19-Mar-81  Brad Myers  Combined previous changes
    V1.3   ?-Mar-81   ??         Fixed GetPartName
    V1.2  10-Mar-81  Brad         PartMounted  : boolean;  {this partition is mounted}
                    PartDevice   : integer;  {which disk this par Myers  Bit32 => FSBit32; fixed for new FS syntax
    V1.0  ??-???-??  CMU people  written
-----------------------------------tition is in}
                    PartStart    : DiskAddr; {Disk Address of 1st page}
                    PartEnd      : DiskA---------------------------------------}

{ 
{******************} exports {***************************}

imports Arith fromddr; {Disk Address of last page}
                    PartKind     : PartitionType; {Root or Leaf}
                    PartName Arith;
imports ReadDisk from ReadDisk;

const
  MAXDISKS      =  2;  {Floppy and HardDisk}
  MAXPARTITIONS = 10;  {Maximum     : PartString {name of this partition}
                  end;


var
  DiskTable   : array [0..MAXDISKS-1]  of DeviceRec number of mounted partitions}
  MAXPARTCHARS  =  8;  {how many characters in a partition name}

type

  PartString   = strord;
  PartTable   : array [1..MAXPARTITIONS] of PartRecord;
  

procedure InitAlloc;  {initialize the AllocDisk module, caling[MAXPARTCHARS];

  DeviceRecord = record                 {entry in the DeviceTable}
                    InfoBlk: DiskAddr;led during boot}

procedure DeviceMount(disk: integer);  {mount a disk}

procedure DeviceDismount(disk : integer);  {dismoun  {where the DiskInfoBlock is}
                    InUse  : boolean;   {this DeviceTable entry is valid}
                    Rt a disk}

function  MountPartition(name : string) : integer;  {mount a partion,
                                            ootPartition: PartString {name of this disk}
                 end;
  
  PartRecord   = record                      {entry in          return PartTable index}

procedure DismountPartition(name : string);  {dismount a partition}

function  FindPartitithe PartTable}
                    PartHeadFree : DiskAddr; {pointer to Head of Free List}
                    PartTailFree : on(name : string) : integer;  {given a partion name, look
                                             for it in PartTable, retDiskAddr; {pointer to tail of Free List}
                    PartInfoBlk  : DiskAddr; {pointer to PartInfoBlock}
             urn index}

function  AllocDisk(partition : integer) : DiskAddr;  {allocate a free page
                                     egment for allocation.
    V2.2  14-Apr-81  Brad Myers  Changed to report "device name" instead of
                                  PartRootDir  : DiskAddr; {pointer to Root Directory}
                    PartNumOps   : integer;  {how many operations d  	
 Shrink the error routine.
      
      V1.2  DCF  11 Feb 81  Conforms to new PString; compatable with
                         programs to unconditionally concatenate
                               extensions onto filenames typed by the
                   new System and Compiler.
                            
                                  
      V1.1  JPS   6 Nov 80  1)                  user (e.g. Console:.Map, RSX:.List).
                            4) Clean up control character processing som Add RSX: as an output device, RSX:FileName
                               generates
                                        ^e.
                            5) Make RSX: optional at compile time.  See
                               the CompileRSX constQPip FileName=TI:
                               For each character:
                                 a) Flush RS232 input bufant.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports


imports FileDefs from Filefer.
                                 b) Send RS232 character.
                                 c) Wait for RS232 echo--in theDefs;


const StreamVersion = '1.20';

      IdentLength = 8;          { significant characters in an identifier }

 
ty case of
                                    sending a carriage return, wait for
                                    a line fepe pStreamBuffer = ^StreamBuffer;

     StreamBuffer = record case integer of  { element size: }
      0: (W: array[0..255] oed.
                               Send ^Z at end of file.
                            2) Add RSX: as an input device, RSX:Filf integer);       { 1 or more words, or > 8 bits }
      1: (B1: packed array[0..0] of 0..1);    { 1 bit }
      2: (B2: packeeName
                               generates
                                        ^QPip TI:=FileName
                   d array[0..0] of 0..3);    { 2 bits }
      3: (B3: packed array[0..0] of 0..7);    { 3 bits }
      4: (B4: packed array[0..0                     ^S
                               For each line of RS232 input:
                                 a) Send ] of 0..15);   { 4 bits }
      5: (B5: packed array[0..0] of 0..31);   { 5 bits }
      6: (B6: packed array[0..0] of 0..63); new Screen ClearChar routine
      
      V1.3  JPS  16 Feb 81  1) Implement FullLn predicate which tells you if
           a ^Q.
                                 b) Read from RS232 until end of line.
                                 c) Send a ^S.
                     there is a full line in the keyboard input
                               buffer.
                                                      End of file is indicated by a '>' after an
                               end of line, and the ^S    2) Fix bug in reporting "file opened to $ is not
                               a text file" error.
                       is not sent after
                               the end of file is received.
                            3) In Reset and Rew      3) Import the new Loader module.
                            4) Move $R- to private part.
                            5)rite allow filenames of the
                               form <device name>:.  This allows dumb
                               	
 some files should be deleted and then
             the Scavenger should be run.
 Parameters: partName is the full partition                  (
                   Lsw : integer;
                   Msw : integer
                 );
               2:
-------------------------------------------------------}

{******************} private {***************************}
       
                 (
                   Ptr : FSBit32
                 );
               3:
                 (
                               from a partition}

procedure DeallocDisk(addr : DiskAddr);  {return a page to the free list}

procedure De allocChain(firstaddr,lastaddr : DiskAddr; numblks : integer);
                                {return a bunch of pages to free module Arith;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Implements interim Double precisilist}
                                
function  WhichPartition(addr : DiskAddr) : integer;  {given a Disk Address,
         on arithmetic package
      Needed until Pascal compiler supports type long.
 Copyright (C) 1980 Carnegie-Mellon University
-                               figure out which partition it is in}

procedure DisplayPartitions;  {print the PartTable}

Ex---------------------------------------------------------------------------}
{-------------------------------------------------ception NoFreePartitions;
{-----------------------------------------------------
 Abstract:  Raised when too many partitions a---------------------------
 Versions:
   1-Jun-81  Brad Myers       V2.2 Added comments
  14-Apr-81  George Robertson V2.1 Fre accessed at one time.  The
             limit is MAXPARTITIONS. 
-------------------------------------------------------}
ixed bug in IntDouble
  12-Apr-81  George Robertson V2.0 Converted to use microcode support
  19-Mar-81  Brad Myers       V1.3
Exception BadPart(msg, partName: String);
{-----------------------------------------------------
 Abstract:  Raised when the Fixed to import FileDefs
   2-Feb-81  George Robertson at Carnegie-Mellon University
                              V1.0 Fixedre is something wrong with a partition.  This
            means that the Scavenger should be run.
 Parameters: msg is the prob DoubleInt to handle negative integers.
                                   Fixed DoubleMul to handle
                         lem and partName is the partition name.  Print
             error message as: WriteLn('** ',msg,' for ',partName); 
----------          multiplicands > 2^15
                                   by using Knuth's algorithm on p.233 of Knuth
               ---------------------------------------------}

Exception PartFull(partName: String);
{--------------------------------------                    vol.2.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------}
exports

imports Fi---------------
 Abstract:  Raised when there are no free blocks in a partition to be
             allocated.  This means thatleDefs from FileDefs;  { to get FSBitnn }

type
  MyDouble = packed record
             case integer of
               1:
  	
}
      9: (C: packed array[0..255] of char);   { for character structured }
      end;
     

     ControlChar = 0..#37;  acked
                                       files }
       Length        : integer;      { length of buffer in words for un-              { ordinal of an ASCII control
                                            character }

     FileKind = (BlockSt
                                       packed files, in elements for packed
                                       files }
  ructured, CharacterStructured);

     FileType = { file of Thing }
      packed record
       Flag: packed record case integ     BlockNumber   : integer;      { next logical block number }
       Buffer        : pStreamBuffer;{ I/O buffer }
       Leer of
        0: (CharReady  : boolean;           { character is in file window }
            FEoln      : boolean;           ngthInBlocks: integer;      { file length in blocks }
       LastBlockLength:integer;      { last block length in bits }
     { end of line flag }
            FEof       : boolean;           { end of file }
            FNotReset  : boolean;           {  SizeInWords   : integer;      { element size in words, 0 means
                                       packed file }
       S false if a Reset has been
                                              performed on this file }
            FNotOpen   : booizeInBits    : 0..16;        { element size in bits for packed
                                       files }
       ElsPerWorlean;           { false if file is open }
            FNotRewrite: boolean;           { set false if a Rewrite has been
      d    : 0..16;         { elements per word for packed files }
       Element: { Thing } record case integer of  {The File window                                        performed on this file }
            FExternal  : boolean;           { not used - will }
        1: (C: char);
        2: (W: array[0..0] of integer)
        end
       end;



     ChArray = packed array[1.be permanent/temp
                                              file flag }
            FBusy      : boolean;           { IO i.1] of char; {For read/write character array}


     Identifier = string[IdentLength];
     IdentTable = array[0..1] of Idens in progress }
            FKind      : FileKind);
        1: (skip1     : 0..3;
            ReadError : 0..7);
        2: tifier;
     
     
     
     
var StreamSegment: integer;     { Segment buffer for I/O buffers }
    KeyBuffer: packed a(skip2     : 0..15;
            WriteError: 0..3)
        end;
       EolCh, EofCh, EraseCh, NoiseCh: ControlChar; {self explrray[0..255] of char;
    KeyNext, KeyLength: integer;


     
     
 procedure StreamInit( var F: FileType; WordSize, Bitanatory}
       OmitCh        : set of ControlChar;
       FileNum       : integer;      { POS file number }
       Index    Size: integer;
                       CharFile: boolean );
 procedure StreamOpen( var F: FileType; var Name: PathName;
         { 6 bits }
      7: (B7: packed array[0..0] of 0..127);  { 7 bits }
      8: (B8: packed array[0..0] of 0..255);  { 8 bits      : integer;      { current word in buffer for un-packed
                                       files, current element for p   	
module Clock;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Clock - Perq clock rou---------------------------------------------------}

exports


imports GetTimeStamp from GetTimeStamp;
     
     
contines.
{       J. P. Strait       1 Feb 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
{ st ClockVersion = '1.6';


type TimeString = String;


procedure SetTStamp( Stamp: TimeStamp );
procedure SetTString( Str      Clock implements the Perq human-time clock.  Times are represented
{       internally by a TimeStamp record which has numing: TimeString);
procedure GetTString( var String: TimeString );
procedure StampToString( Stamp: TimeStamp; var String: TimeSeric fields for Year,
{       Month, Day, Hour, Minute, and Second.  Times may also be expressed
{       by a string of the fotring );
procedure StringToStamp( String: TimeString; var Stamp: TimeStamp);

Exception BadTime;
{--------------------------rm YY MMM DD HH:MM:SS where MMM is a three (or
{       more) letter month name and HH:MM:SS is time of day on a 24 hour
{     --------------------------
 Abstract: Raised when a string passed does not represent a valid time
----------------------------      Byte0 : FSBit8;
                   Byte1 : FSBit8;
                   Byte2 : FSBit8;
                   Byte3 : FSBit8  clock.
{
{       The clock module exports routines for setting and reading the current
{       time as either a TimeStamp o
                 )
             end;
             
function DoubleAdd(a,b : FSBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleSub(a,b : Fr a character string, and exports routines
{       for converting between TimeStamps and strings.
{       
{-----------------SBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleNeg(a   : FSBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleMul(a,b : FSBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleD------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------------------------------------------------iv(a,b : FSBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleInt(a   : integer) : FSBit32;
function IntDouble(a   : FSBit32) : integer;
functi----------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ V1.6  17 Dec 81 WJHansen
{    Set Past.Lower in SetTStamp
{
{ V1.5  12 May 81  Brad Myeon DoubleBetween(a,start,stop : FSBit32) : boolean;

function DoubleMod(a,b : FSBit32) : FSBit32;
function DoubleAbs(a   : FSrs.
{ If invalid time string then raise a signal.
{ }

{ V1.4  19 Mar 81  Brad Myers.
{ PERQ_String.
{ }

{ V1.3   2 MarBit32) : FSBit32;

function DblEql(a,b : FSBit32) : boolean;
function DblNeq(a,b : FSBit32) : boolean;
function DblLeq(a,b : 81  John Strait.
{ Don't export IO from Clock and GetTimeStamp.
{ }

{ V1.2   2 Mar 81  John Strait.
{ Add title, copyrigh FSBit32) : boolean;
function DblLes(a,b : FSBit32) : boolean;
function DblGeq(a,b : FSBit32) : boolean;
function DblGtr(a,b t, and abstract.
{ Add version number.
{ Add retroactive change history.
{ }

{ V1.1  28 Feb 81  Brian Rosen.
{ Check for : FSBit32) : boolean;

private
                                                                                              invalid month numbers in StampToString.
{ }

{ V1.0   1 Feb 81  John Strait.
{ Start file.
{ }
{--------------------------  	
----------------------}


 exception NotTextFile( FileName: PathName );
{--------------------------------------------------- when an attempt is made to read past the end of the file.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{--------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made to open a non-text file to a
{       charact
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception UnitIOError( FileName: PathName                 WordSize, BitSize: integer; CharFile: boolean;
                       OpenWrite: boolean );
 procedure Streamer-structured device.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the device.
{
{-------------------------------------------Close( var F: FileType );
 procedure GetB( var F: Filetype );
 procedure PutB( var F: Filetype );
 procedure GetC( var F: Fil----------------------------------}


 exception NotOpen;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------etype );
 procedure PutC( var F: FileType );
 procedure PReadln( var F: Filetype );
 procedure PWriteln( var F: Filetype );
------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made to use a file which is not open.
{
{--------------------- procedure InitStream;
 function StreamName( var F: FileType ): PathName;
 function FullLn( var F: Text ): Boolean;
 procedur--------------------------------------------------------}


 exception NotReset( FileName: PathName );
{--------------------e StreamKeyBoardReset( var F: Text );


 exception ResetError( FileName: PathName );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made to read a file---------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when unable to reset a file--usually file not found but which is open but
{       has not been reset.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------
{       also could be ill-formatted name or bad device name.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.--------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception NotRewrite( FileName: PathName );
{------
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception RewriteError( FileName: Path-----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made Name );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when unato write a file which is open but
{       has not been
{       rewritten.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the fible to rewrite a file--usually file unknown device
{       or partition but also could be ill-formatted name or bad device namele or device.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception PastEof( FileN.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{-------------------------------------------------------ame: PathName );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised   	
-------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ Date: 26 Jan-82  V3.6 Brad Myers
{ New procedure NextString like Nex{ }
{------------------------------------------------------------------}


{********************} Exports {****************tID only doesn't remove final character.
{ }

{ Date:  5 Jan-82  V3.5 Brad Myers
{ Fixed ParseStringArgs so inputs and outpu****}

Const CmdPVersion = '3.5';
      MaxCmds = 30;
      MaxCString = 255;
      CCR = Chr(13);  {same as standard CR}
ts correctly set to NIL if error.
{ Additional error message from ParseStringArgs for , in outputs.
{ }

{ Date: 29 Dec-81        CmdChar = Chr(24);
      CmdFileChar = Chr(26);
      
Type CString = String[MaxCString];
     CmdArray = Array[1..MaxV3.4 Brad Myers
{ No period after ErAnyError message.
{ New error message: ErBadQuote.
{ Changed so err set to '' if no errorCmds] Of String;

Procedure CnvUpper(Var Str:CString);  {*** USE ConvUpper IN PERQ_String***}
Function UniqueCmdIndex(Cmd:CSt (to avoid StringTooLong abort)
{ }

{ Date: 28 Dec-81  V3.3 Brad Myers
{ New procedure for removing quotes.  
{ New procedring; Var CmdTable: CmdArray;
                        NumCmds:Integer): Integer;
Procedure RemDelimiters(Var Src:CString; Deliure for reporting errors.  
{ Renamed destroy procedures to Dstry... due to name conflicts
{ }

{ Date: 18 Dec-81  V3.2 Bradmiters:CString;
                        Var BrkChar:CString);
Procedure GetSymbol(Var Src,Symbol:CString; Delimiters:CString; Myers
{ Allow quoting of special characters for NextID.  
{ }
{
{ Date: 27 Nov-81  V3.1 Brad Myers
{ New procedure: Destro
                    Var BrkChar:CString);

Function NextID(var id: CString; var isSwitch: Boolean): Char;
Function NextIDStryCmdFiles.  
{ }

{ Date: 13 Nov-81  V3.0 Brad Myers
{ Add new commands to make parsing easier.  Also don't require importining(var s, id: CString;var isSwitch: Boolean): Char;

Type pArgRec = ^ArgRec;
     ArgRec = RECORD
                name: CSt------------------------}

private
                                                                                          g
{ system for UsrCmdLine.  
{ }

{ Date: 13-May-81  V2.0 John Strait
{ Change length of most strings to be 255 characters  in length.  The strings
{   in CmdArrays are left as 80 characters because 255 character strings take
{   a lot of space and wModule CmdParse;
{---------------------------------------------------------------
{ Abstract:
{    This module provides a nume figure that no command names will be longer than
{   80 characters.
{ }

{ Date: 19-Mar-81  Brad Myers
{ PERQ_String.
{ ber of routines to help with command parsing.
{
{ Written by Don Scelza    April 30, 1980
{
{ Copyright (C) 1980 - Three Riv}

{ Date: 12-Feb-81  Diana Forgy
{ Module is now compatable with new PString, System, and Compiler.
{ }

{ Date: 23-Sep-8ers Computer Corporation
{---------------------------------------------------------------}


{-----------------------------0 Miles Barel
{ Incremented MaxCmds to 30.  Added the version number.
{ }

{ Date: 30-Apr-80 Don Scelza
{ Create CmdParse
  	
y referencing a file which has
{       never been opened.
{
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception IdNotDefined( FileName: PathName; Id: Identifier );
{-----------------------}


 exception NotIdentifier( FileName: PathName );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an undefined identifier-------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an identifier is expected on a file, but something
{       else is enc is read.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{       Id - the identifier which was read.
{
{--ountered.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception NotNumber( FileName: PathName );
{------------------------------}


 exception NotBoolean( FileName: PathName );
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a number is e );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when IOCRead---------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a boolean is expected on a file, but something
{       e or IOCWrite returns an error status.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the device.
{
{---------------------------lse is encountered.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception TimeOutError( FileName: PathName );
{--------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception BadIdTable( FileName: PathName );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a device times out.
{
{ Parameter-------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised by ReadIdentifier when the identifier table is bad.s:
{       FileName - name of the device.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------

 exception UndfDevice;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   --------------------}


 exception IdNotUnique( FileName: PathName; Id: Identifier );
{-------------------------------------    Raised when an attempt is made to reference a file which is open
{       to a character-structured device, but the device n----------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when non-unique identifier is read.
{
{ Parameters:
umber is bad.
{       In the current system (lacking automatic initialization of file
{       variables), this may be caused b{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{       Id - the identifier which was read.
{
{------------------------------- 	  	
xt: pSwitchRec;
                 END;

Function ParseCmdArgs(var inputs, outputs: pArgRec; var switches: pSwitchRec;
                       var err: String): boolean;
Function ParseStringArgs(s: CString; var inputs, outputs: pArgRec;
                 module Code;

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Code.Pas - Common def     var switches: pSwitchRec; var err: String): boolean;
Procedure DstryArgRec(var a: pArgRec);
Procedure DstrySwitchRec(var initions for the Linker and Loader.
{       J. P. Strait         10 Feb 81.  Rewritten as a module.
{       Copyright (C) Threa: pSwitchRec);

Type pCmdList = ^CmdListRec;
     CmdListRec = RECORD
                    cmdFile: Text;
                 e Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
{
{       Code.Pas defines constants and types shared by the Linker and t   isCharDevice: Boolean;
                    next: pCmdList;
                    seg: Integer;
                  END;

Prohe
{ Loader.  These include definitions of the run file and of offsets in the
{ stack segment.
{
{ Design:
{       When thecedure InitCmdFile(var inF: pCmdList; seg: Integer);
Function DoCmdFile(line: CString; var inF: pCmdList; var err: String): boo format of run files is changed, the constant RFileFormat
{ must also be changed.  This is necessary to prevent the procedures lean;
Procedure ExitCmdFile(var inF: pCmdList);
Procedure ExitAllCmdFiles(var inF: pCmdList);
Procedure DstryCmdFiles(var inFwhich
{ read run files from failing.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


: pCmdList);

Function RemoveQuotes(var s: CString): boolean;

Type ErrorType = (ErBadSwitch, ErBadCmd, ErNoSwParam, ErNoCmd{  6 Jan 82  1.8  Brad Myers
{ Changed qcode version number to 3.
{ }

{  6 Jan 82  1.7  Brad Myers
{ Fixed definition of SParam, ErSwParam,
                  ErCmdParam, ErSwNotUnique, ErCmdNotUnique, ErNoOutFile,
                  ErOneInput, ErOnegBlock to include Version and Copyright strings.
{ }

{ 21 Jul 81  1.6  John Strait
{ Add Hints to the segment information eOutput, ErFileNotFound, ErDirNotFound,
                  ErIllCharAfter, ErCannotCreate, ErAnyError, ErBadQuote);
           node.
{ }

{ 18 May 81  1.5  Brad Myers
{ Increment Q-Code version number.
{ }

{  9 Apr 81  1.4  John Strait
{ Change R       
Procedure StdError(err: ErrorType; param: CString; leaveProg: Boolean);
Function NextString(var s, id: CString; var isunInfo to be a record that just contains the header information
{ and define a pointer to it.
{ Change node definitions in ordring;
                next: pArgRec;
              END;

     pSwitchRec = ^SwitchRec;
     SwitchRec = RECORD
           Switch: Boolean): Char;

{********************} Private {********************}
                                                      switch: CString;
                   arg: CString;
                   correspondingArg: pArgRec;
                   ne  	 	
----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a real number is rea-----------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a real number is expected on a file, but something
{       ed from a file, but it is too small.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------------------lse is encountered.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception BadBase( FileName: PathName; Base: Integer );
{----------------------------------------------}



private
                                                                      -----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made  to read a number with a numeric base
{       that is not in the range 2..36.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the Program System;
{------------------------------------------------------------
{     System - POS main program.
{     Perq Soffile or device.
{       Base - numeric base (which is not in the range 2..36).
{
{-------------------------------------------tware Group.
{     Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980, 1981.
{     
{ Abstract:
{     Initialize POS 
{ ----------------------------------}


 exception LargeReal( FileName: PathName );
{-----------------------------------------    and go into loop alternately running Shell and user program
{------------------------------------------------------------}------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a real number is read from a file, but it is too large

{------------------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{ 
{      21 Jan 82  V2.2 BAM     Add new varxpected on a file, but something
{       else is encountered.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device..
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{-------------------------------------------------------
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception LargeNumber( FileName: Path----------------------}


 exception RealWriteError( FileName: PathName );
{------------------------------------------------Name );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when a n-----------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       Raised when an attempt is made to write a real number which is 
{       umber is read from a file, but it is too large.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{---------invalid.
{
{ Parameters:
{       FileName - name of the file or device.
{
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception SmallReal( FileName: PathName );
{------------------------------------}


 exception NotReal( FileName: PathName );
{------------------------------------------------ 
  	
      CommentLen   = 80;      { the length of comment and version str in seg}
        


type
        SNArray = packed arra             
        ImpNode = record
                   SId      : SNArray;     { name of imported segment }
              er to implement RunFiles module.
{ }

{  8 Apr 81  1.3  John Strait
{ Add "ProgramSN" to RunHeader.  This is the ISN of the y[1..SegLength] of Char;  { segment name }

        pFNString = ^FNString;
        
        FNString = String[FileLength];  program segment.
{ }

{ 19 Mar 81  1.2  Miles A. Barel
{ Increased size of SEG and RUN file names and added QCode Version st{ file name }
        
        QVerRange = 0..255;             { range of QCode version numbers }


        SegHint = recoruff
{ }

{ 23 Feb 81  1.1   Don Scelza
{ Changed the name Header to RunHeader.  There was a name
{ conflict with the C-MU fd case Integer of
                    1: (Fid   : Integer;      { file id }
                        Update: TimeStamp);   { upile system.
{ }

{ 10 Feb 81  1.0  John Strait
{ Start file.
{ }

exports


  imports GetTimeStamp from GetTimeStamp;date time }
                    2: (Word1 : Integer;
                        Word2 : Integer;
                        Word3 :



const   CodeVersion = '1.7';
        RFileFormat = 2;

        QCodeVersion = 3;       { Current QCode Version Number Integer)
                    end;
        
        
        pSegNode = ^SegNode;
        
        pImpNode = ^ImpNode;
 }
        FileLength   = 100;     { max chars in a file name }
        SegLength    = 8;       { max chars in a segment name 

        { Segment information record:}

        SegNode = record
                   SegId    : SNArray;     { segment name}
        StackLeader  = 2;       { number of leader words in stack before }
                                { XSTs (must be e }
                   RootNam  : pFNString;   { file name without .Pas or .Seg }
                   Hint     : SegHint;     { ven)                    }
                                { Currently contains initial TP and GP   }
        DefStackSize = #2hint to the segment file }
                   GDBSize  : integer;     { size of this segment's GDB }
                   XSTSiz0;     { default stack segment size (in blocks) }
        DefHeapSize  = #4;      { default heap segment size (in blocks) }
  e  : integer;     { size of this segment's XST }
                   GDBOff   : integer;     { StackBase offset to GDB }
            DefIncStack  = #4;      { default stack size increment (in blocks) }
        DefIncHeap   = #4;      { default heap size              ISN      : integer;     { segment number inside Linker }
                   CodeSize : integer;     { number of blincrement (in blocks) }
        FudgeStack   = #2000;   { fudge space between system and user GDB's }
                        ocks in .Seg file }
                   SSN      : integer;
                   UsageCnt : integer;
                   ImpList         { this must hold all loader variables at }
                                { maximum configuration in LoadStack }

   : pImpNode;
                   Next     : pSegNode
                   end;


        { Import information record }
       
 	
                    add TimeFID
{                              remove CmdFile
{                              rearrange definit to CtlCAbort.
{      13-May-81  BAM          Remove old comments about stand alone 
{                              Add vble fions of variables
{                              change xxTime variables to Long
{                              move StreamKeyor default cursor function (screen
{                                 color) that can be set by login from profile
{           BoardReset to Shell
{       1-Dec-81  BAM          Added the new exception HELPKey and a default
{                                               Add comments to some exceptions
{      13-May-81  JPS          1. Add exceptions and default handlers for 
    handler.
{                              Added default handler for Flush Fail that works
{                                 {                                 control-C.
{                              2. Add procedures to enable and disable 
{        like diskFailure.
{                              Make ^C^C clear ^S.
{      05-NOV-81  DAS          Added calls to EtherInit.                         control-C processing.
{                              3. Add exception to ExitProgram.
{              
{      13-Aug-81  BAM          Add new vbles to hold pointers for the shell.
{      30-Jun-81  BAM          Add new vbles for                 4. Remove vestiges of old system: standard error
{                                 procedures.
{      12-May-8DefScrOff and Comp and demo.
{      25-Jun-81  BAM          Change to window 0 before error type out.
{      25-Jun-81  JPS   1  BAM          Add default handlers for many exceptions
{                              Use new IO
{       6-Apr-81  JPS             Turn tablet off in command loop.
{      23-Jun-81  BAM          Address for DiskFailure printed in unsigned 
{             Retrofit changes for exceptions to version of
{                               system that diverged after 15-Mar-81.
{                           decimal
{       1-Jun-81  BAM          Do automatic re-enable of swapping if turned off
{                                        Virtual memory and timing statistics.
{                              Get rid of "System" conditional c                by Shell (i.e. for Scavenger)
{      28-May-81  BAM          Handler for Stream Reset error
{      23-May-81  ompile.
{                              Change main version from C to D.
{      15-Mar-81  JPS          Put in stuff for exceptJPS          Replace enable/disable of control-c processing
{                              (exported by System) with enable/disions.
{      28-Mar-81  BAM          Changed length of UsrCmdLine to 255.
{      19-Mar-81  BAM          PERQ_String.
{      iables isFloppy, PopAllowed.
{       6 Jan 82  V2.1 WJH     Use smaller screen for floppy booted on 1/4 MB
{
{       4 Dec 81able of
{                              KeyBoard interrupts (exported by IO_Others).
{      22-May-81  JPS          Fix control  V2.0 WJH     Change to ShellCtrl from three vars
{                              add UseCmd, UserPtr, and UserInt
{          -c processing.
{      18-May-81  JPS          Use StreamKeyBoardReset.
{                              Change TwoCtlC exception   	
definition }
                    { first block: }
                    true: (ProgramSegment: boolean;
                       981.
{
{ Abstract:
{        The ControlStore module exports types defining the format of PERQ
{ micro-instructions and proce    SegBlkFiller  : 0..127;
                           QVersion      : QVerRange;
                           ModuleName    : Sdures to load and call routines in the
{ control-store.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------NArray;
                           FileName      : FNString;
                           NumSeg        : integer;
            -----------}

{-------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ 9 Dec 81  V1.2  WJHansen
{    Remove close comment               ImportBlock   : integer;
                           GDBSize       : integer;
                           Version bracket from inside comment
{
{ 3 Jun 81  V1.1  John Strait.
{ Add Virgil headers and comments.
{ }

{ ca. Jul 81  V1.0       FilN     : pFNString;   { file name of imported segment }
                   XGP      : integer;     { global pointer of i       : String[CommentLen];
                           Comment       : String[CommentLen]);
                    false:(Block:mport }
                   XSN      : integer;     { internal number of import }
                   Seg      : pSegNode;
     array[0..255] of integer)
                    end;
        
        CImpInfo = record case boolean of   { Import List Info -               Next     : pImpNode
                   end;


        { Run file: }
        
        RunElement = (RunHeade as generated }
                                            { by the compiler }
                        true: ( ModuleName: SNr,SysSegment,UserSegment,Import,SegFileNames);
        
        RunInfo = record   { run header }
                   RFileForArray;  { module identifier }
                                FileName:   FNString  { file name }
                            mat:integer;
                   Version:    integer;
                   System:     boolean;
                   InitialGP:  i  );
                        false:( Ary: array [0..0] of integer)
                     end;
                     
        Snteger;
                   CurOffset:  integer;
                   StackSize:  integer;
                   StackIncr:  integeegFileType = file of SegBlock;



private
                                                                                 r;
                   HeapSize:   integer;
                   HeapIncr:   integer;
                   ProgramSN:  integer;
                    SegCount:   integer
                   end;

        RunFileType = file of Integer;


        { Segment module ControlStore;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ ControlStore - Load afile: }
        
        pSegBlock = ^SegBlock;
        
        SegBlock = packed record case boolean of       { .SEG file nd call routines in the PERQ control-store.
{ J. P. Strait   ca. July 80.
{ Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1  	
tring.
{                              
{
{      17-Nov-80  Don Scelza   Added the code for LastFileName.
{                  .255;         {Groupid of current user}
    CurUserName,                {LogIn name of current user}
    CurPFile: String;    17-Mar-81  BAM          Set time when come up so Login LookUp faster.
{       3-Mar-81  DAS          Added variables for Login.            This will allow a user to supply the
{                              name of a file once for the Editor, Compiler,
  Added
{                              InCmdFile for Shell.
{      25-Feb-81  DAS          Added FlushAll call in command.
{ {                              and Linker.
{      14-Nov-80  Don Scelza   Added conditional compile for stand
{                    24-Feb-81  JPS          Add code to shrink and expand the screen.
{                              *** Caution *** The Shell               alone programs 
{      10 Oct 80  JPS          Add support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
{      23 Sep 80   must never be loaded
{                              when the screen is small, because it might
{                             JPS and DAS  Add PAUSE command.
{                              Announce 12 or 24 MByte disk.
{}



{********************} allocate a buffer for a command file.  This
{                              buffer will hang around after the Shell returns
{  Exports {********************}

Const MainVersion = 'D';
      DebugSystemInit = False;
      FirstDDS = 199;
      ShellC                             to the system.
{      23-Feb-81  RFR          Added SysDisk, SysBootChar definitions.
{          onst = 'Shell.';
      LogConst = 'LogIn.';
      PFileConst = 'Default.Profile';
      
      SysTiming = True;    { Gather                    Added call to FSSetupSystem.
{      19-Feb-81  John Strait  Incorporate system version number into the
{   System timing statistics.  If this constant
                             is changed, IO, Loader, Memory, Movemem, System,
                               name of the LogIn run file.
{      17-Feb-81   Don Scelza  Removed the include file for SysVers.
{                          and Shell should be re-compiled, and the System
                             should be re-linked. }
                              Put the code inline in System.
{      16-Feb-81  John Strait  Removed the Loader to a separate mo

Type Sys9s = String[10];


Var UsrCmdLine: String[255];    {Command line entered by user}
    UseCmd: Boolean;          dule.
{      16-Feb-81  Don Scelza   Changed System to use Perq.String and
{                              changed MainVersion   {Set True to tell shell to execute UsrCmdLine}
    InCmdFile: Boolean;         {True if shell commands from file}
    LastFito C.
{      11-Feb-81  Diana Forgy  Took out command interpreter and made
{                              most of it program SleName,               {Name of file to use if none given}
    RFileName,                  {Name of next program to run}
    Shhell.
{
{                              This program is compatable with the
{                              new Compiler and PSellName: String;          {Name of Shell}

    CurUserID,                  {Index of user in System.Users}
    CurGroupID: 0.   	
    SFF:    0..63;
             ALU0:   0..1;
             ALU1:   0..1;
             ALU23:  0..3)
         end;
      
 lements the basic low level operations to disk devices.
{It services the Hard Disk and the Floppy.  When dealing with the flopp    MicroBinary = { The format of a micro-instruction and its address as
                     produced by the micro-assembler. y
{here, the structures on the hard disk are mapped to the structures
{on the floppy.
{--------------------------------------}
       record
         Adrs: integer;
         MI:   MicroInstruction
         end;
      
     TransMicro = { The forma------------------------------------}

{---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Change ht of a micro-instruction as needed by the WCS
                    QCode. }
       packed record case integer of
         0: (istory.


  12 Jan 82  BAM  V3.13 Fix bug in FloppyIO failure so deallocates storage.
  24 Jun 81  BAM  V3.12 Fix to preventWord1: integer;
             Word2: integer;
             Word3: integer);
         1: (ALU23: 0..3;
             ALU0:  0.. retry if floppy write and device not
                          writable.
  28 May 81  BAM  V3.11 Fix bug in floppy header die1;
             W:     0..1;
             ALU1:  0..1;
             A:     0..7;
             Z:     0..255;
             S-On-error.
                        Add Recalibrate light to floppy
                        New light definitions
  26 May 81 FF:   0..63;
             H:     0..1;
             B:     0..1;
             JmpCnd:0..255)
         end;
      
     Mic JPS  V3.10 Use new Lights module.
  19 May 81  BAM  V3.9  Fixed position of Reset light
  12 May 81  BAM  V3.8  Removed printJohn Strait.
{ Started file.
{ }
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exportsroFile = file of MicroBinary;   { A file of micro-instructions. }
     
     
 procedure LoadControlStore( var F: MicroFile )


type MicroInstruction = { The format of a micro-instruction as produced by
                          the micro-assembler. ;
 procedure LoadMicroInstruction( Adrs: integer; MI: MicroInstruction );
 procedure JumpControlStore( Adrs: integer );
 
 }
       packed record case integer of
         0: (Word1: integer;
             Word2: integer;
             Word3: integer
private
                                                                                                                      );
         1: (Jmp: 0..15;
             Cnd: 0..15;
             Z:   0..255;
             SF:  0..15;
             F:   0 ..3;
             ALU: 0..15;
             H:   0..1;
             W:   0..1;
             B:   0..1;
             A:   0.. 7;
             Y:   0..255;
             X:   0..255);
         2: (JmpCnd: 0..255;
             Fill1:  0..255;
         module DiskIO;
{---------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{Abstract:
{
{This module imp  	
tem version number}
    SystemInitialized: Boolean; {True after system initialized}
    DDS: Integer;               {Keeps curyou should clear
{       CtrlCPending in your handler. If you are catching control-c's to
{       try to prevent aborts, you srent diagnostic display value}
    ShouldReEnableSwapping: Boolean;  {True if swapping must be reenabled}
    SavedSwapId: Inthould enable CtlCAbort also, since the
{       Stream package will raise it when the control-c is read.
{
{------------------eger;       {Save id of where to swap to}

    {$ifc SysTiming then}
    LoadTime, OldLoadTime: long;
    ExecuteTime, OldEx-----------------------------------------------------------}

Const ErrCtlCAbort = 5; {******}
Exception CtlCAbort;
{-------ecuteTime: long;
    SwapTime, OldSwapTime: long;
    MoveTime, OldMoveTime: long;
    IOTime, OldIOTime: long;
    PrintSta----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       CtlCAbort is raised by the KeyBo       {Name of current profile file}
    UserMode: Boolean;          {True while executing user program}

    CtrlCPending: tistics: Boolean;
    {$endc}
    

    UserPtr: pointer;           {A pointer variable for use between user
              Boolean;      {True if one control-C typed}

    NextSSize: Integer;         {Screen size for next program}
    NextSCompleme                   programs.  (Use IncRefCount to keep segment)}
    UserInt: integer;           {May be a segment number for Unted: Boolean; {Whether to complement bottom for next pgm}
    NextSOff: Boolean;          {Whether bottom should display data serPtr}

    DemoInt: Integer;           {reserved for Demo system}
    
    isFloppy: Boolean;          {true if booted frobits}
    DefCursFunct: Integer;      {What to set curs func to after each prog}
    DefScrComp: Boolean;        {Default valum floppy, else false}
    pointAllowed: Boolean;      {true if should use pointing device}
 
 
{*** WARNING!!  IF YOU CHANGEe for NextSComplemented}
    DefScrOff: Boolean;         {Default value for NextSOff}

    ShellCtrl: pointer;         {Point THE EXPORTED PROCEDURES AND EXCEPTIONS, MAKE
{***            SURE THE NUMBERS FOR THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS ARE UPDATED
{***  er to information record for Shell}
    TimeFID: integer;           {File ID of file holding current time}
    CmdSegment: Int          AND RECOMPILE SCROUNGE IF CHANGED !!!!! *****}

{*** WARNING!!  DO NOT CHANGE THE ORDER OF THE ^C EXCEPTIONS !!!!! *eger;        {SegmentNumber of seg holding command files}

    InPmd: Boolean;             {True if in Scrounge (PostMortemDum****}

Procedure Command;
Procedure SetDDS( Display: Integer );
Procedure SysVers( n: integer; var S: string );

Const Errp)}
    SysDisk: Integer;           {Number of the disk booted from}
    SysBootChar: Integer;       {Ord(char held down to boCtlC = 4; {******}
Exception CtlC;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstraot)}

    StrVersion: string;         {System version number as a string}
    SystemVersion: Integer;     {Integer giving sysct:
{       CtlC is raised by the KeyBoard interrupt routine when a control-c
{       is typed.  If you handle this exception    	
f the
                          SetCylinder StartIO.
  20 Apr 81  JPS  V3.6  Use DiskSegment consistently.
                  -------------------------------}

{******************} exports {***************************}

imports Arith from Arith;
imp      Set DiskSegment as UnSwappable for virtual memory.
   9 Apr 81  BAM  V3.5  Fix Retry so no recal on last time; DiskError orts FileDefs from FileDefs;
imports IOErrors from IOErrors;

const
    HARDNUMBER          = 0;             {device code oftell op.
                         Fixed bug in DoDiskIO exit
  30 Mar 81  BAM  V3.4  Added Retry count to TryDisk and Const Nu Shugart Disk}
    FLOPPYNUMBER        = 1;             {device code of FloppyDisk}

    {a Disk Address can be distinguishedmTries.
  27 Mar 81  BAM  V3.3  Added comments and WriteLn to DiskError.
  19 Mar 81  BAM  V3.2  Combined JPS+GGR and BAM's ch from a Segment Address by the
      upper two bits (in 32 bits).  These bits have a nonzero code to
      which disk the addranges.
  17 Mar 81  GGR  V3.1  Removed WinchDebug and FloppyDebug.
  17 Mar 81  JPS  V3.0  Changed MapAddr and UnMapAddr to haess is part of}

    RECORDIOBITS        = #140000;       {VirtualAddress upper 16 bits of disk}
    DISKBITS            = REndle 24 Mbyte
                          drives.
                        Changed harddisk interlace factor to one.
           CORDIOBITS + (HARDNUMBER*(#20000));
    FLOPBITS            = RECORDIOBITS + (FLOPPYNUMBER*(#20000));

    {The following def             Removed partition kind 'node'.
                        Added TryDiskIO, and changed DiskError printout.
         initions tell how many entries there are in the
     three pieces of the random index.  The first piece (Direct)
     are bloc               Changed FirstDiskBlock for harddisks and
                        LastDiskBlock for 24 Mbyte disks.
            ks whose DiskAddresses are actually contained in the
     Random Index (which is part of the FileInformationBlock).
     The s            Improved retry and retry messages from DiskIO and
                          FloppyIO.
  16 Mar 81  BAM  V2.2  Chanecond section has a list of blocks each of which contain 128 Disk
     Addresses of blocks in the file, forming a one level indged directory to have extra bits
   5 Mar 81  BR   V2.1  Added comments
   5 Mar 81  BAM  V2.0  Changed Definitions and importirect addressing
     scheme.
     For very large files, the third section (DblInd) has DiskAddresses of
     blocks which po out for DiskErrors; more accurate print
                          out of errors when happen; blink "light" during
            FileDefs.
   3 Mar 81  JPS  V1.4  Fix DiskReset to agree with IO V4.4.
   1 Mar 81  BR   V1.3  Change FileDate to TimeStamp.               IOReset.
                        Added new Exceptions DiskFailure and BadDevice;
                        Remove
   1 Mar 81  JPS  V1.2  Export the DiskReset routine.
  28 Feb 81  JPS  V1.1  Get rid of the LogMapping parameter to MapAddr bd Procedure DiskError;
                        Use new IO
   6 May 81  JPS  V3.7  Fix bug in DiskReset by using the new form oy
                          teaching UnitIO not to fool with a hard disk address.
--------------------------------------------  	
 to and clear Stream's line editing buffer.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------} Sys9s);
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       HelpKey is rai

Const ErrCtlShftC = 6; {******}
Exception CtlShftC;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------sed when the HELP key is hit.
{
{ Parameters:
{       retStr - the set of characters to put into the input stream.  This
{  -------
{
{ Abstract:
{       CtlShftC is raised by the KeyBoard interrupt routine when a control-
{       shift-c is typed.              should be set by the handler if it continues    from the
{                exception.   Likely values are "/Help<C  If you handle this exception you should clear
{       CtrlCPending in your handler.
{
{       When this is raised by the KeR>" and chr(7)
{                (the current value returned).  The key board interupt routine
{                sets retStr to yBoard interrupt routine, the KeyBoard
{       type-ahead buffer is cleared.  You cannot prevent this.
{
{       If your prog'' before raising this exception so if not set,
{                and the handler resumes, nothing will be put into the input
{ram uses a Text file and you want to clear the line editing
{       buffer for that file, you should call the Stream routine
{                stream.
{ Resume:
{         Allowed.  Should set retStr first.
{---------------------------------------------       StreamKeyBoardReset(F) (assuming F is the name of the file).  If F
{       is a Text file which is attached to the conso--------------------------------}
type DoubleWord = ^integer;    {should use Long instead}


{********************} Private ard interrupt routine when the second
{       of two adjacent control-c's is typed.  It is also raised by the
{       Stream ple, this will get rid
{       of the character F^ points to and clear Stream's line editing buffer.
{
{----------------------ackage when a control-c is read.  If you handle this exception
{       you should clear CtrlCPending in your handler.
{
{    -------------------------------------------------------}

Const ErrExitProgram = 7; {******}
Exception ExitProgram;
{-------   When this is raised by the KeyBoard interrupt routine, the KeyBoard
{       type-ahead buffer is cleared.  If you want to pr----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ExitProgram is raised to abort (event this, you must
{       catch CtlC also.
{
{       If your program uses a Text file and you want to clear the line editior exit) a program.  The default
{       handler for CtlCAbort and Scrounge raise this exception.
{
{       WARNING: No one bng
{       buffer for that file, you should call the Stream routine
{       StreamKeyBoardReset(F) (assuming F is the name of ut System and Loader should Handle this exception.
{                Anyone may raise it to exit a program.
{
{---------------the file).  If F
{       is a Text file which is attached to the console, this will get rid
{       of the character F^ points--------------------------------------------------------------}

Const ErrHelpKey = 8; {******}
Exception HelpKey(var retStr:   	
int to other blocks which contain 128 DiskAddresses
     of blocks in the file, forming a two level indirect scheme.}

    DI                
    { A directory is an ordinary file which contains SegIDs of files
      along with their names.  DirectoriRECTSIZE          =  64; { Entries in FIB of blocks directly accessable }
    INDSIZE             =  32; { Entries in FIB of 1 es are hash coded by file name
      to make lookup fast.  They are often sparse files (ie contain
      unallocated blocks belevel indirect blocks }
    DBLINDSIZE          =   2; { Entries in FIB of 2 level indirect blocks }

    FILESPERDIRBLK     tween allocated blocks).  The file name is a
      SimpleName, since a directory can only contain entries for
      files with = 16;  { 256 / SizeOf(DirEntry) }
    NUMTRIES            = 15;  { number of tries at transfer before aborting }
    
type
in the partition (and thus device) where the directory
      itself is located }

    DirEntry   = packed record 
              {Temporary segments go away when processes are destroyed,
     Permanent segments persist until explicitly destroyed
              InUse    : boolean; {true if this DirEntry is valid}
                   Deleted  : boolean; {true if entry deleted butBad Segments are not well formed segments which are not
     readable by the Segment system}

    SpiceSegKind  = (Temporary, not expunged}
                   Archived : boolean; {true if entry is on backup tape}
                   UnUsed   : 0..#1777 Permanent, Bad);
    PartitionType = (Root, UnUsed, Leaf); {A Root Partition is a device}
    DeviceType    = (Winch12, Winch7;   {reserved for later use}
                   ID       : SegID;
                   Filename : SimpleName
                 24, FloppySingle, FloppyDouble,
                     UnUsed1, UnUsed2);

    MyDble = Array [0..1] of integer;
    
    Disend;
                 

    DiskBuffer = packed record
                   case integer of
                     1: (
      kCheatType = record
                      case integer of
                        1: (
                             Addr    :                    Addr : array [0..(DISKBUFSIZE div 2)-1] of DiskAddr
                        );
                     2: (
 DiskAddr
                           );
                        2: (
                             Dbl     : MyDble { should b                          IntData : array [0..DISKBUFSIZE-1] of FSBit16
                        );
                     3: (
e IO.Double but don't
                                                import IO in export section }
                                                    ByteData : packed array [0..DISKBUFSIZE*2-1] of FSBit8
                        );
  {4 is format of  );
                        3: (
                             Seg     : SegID
                           );
                the FileInformationBlock; the FIB has Logical Block -1 }
                     4: ( 
                          
                      4: (
                             Lng     : FSBit32
                           )
                       end;
                   FSData     : FSDataEntry;

                          {The Random Index is a hint of the DiskAddresses
             	
 module UserPass;

{-------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{    This moduleModule SystemDefs;


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       SystemDefs -  provides facilities for dealing with the password
{    and accounts file for PERQ.  The login and protection facilities
{    Common system definitions.
{       John P. Strait  13 May 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
for Perq provide a very simple user validification.  This system
{    is NOT completly secure.
{
{ Written by: Don Scelza
{{
{ Abstract:
{       SystemDefs exports common system Const and Type definitions.  The
{       intent is that SystemDefs sho
{ Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation,  1981.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------uld not export Procedures or Vars since
{       these require a Seg file.  It is also intended that SystemDefs be
{       reas---------}


{  6-Jun-81  V1.3  Brad Myers
{ Fixed so System.Users always in root directory: >System.Users
{ }

{ 29-Apronably short so that it doesn't take long to import.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------81  V1.2  Son Scelza
{ Added code and types for profile and remove user.
{ }

{ 9-Mar-81   V1.1  Don Scelza
{ Changed the -------}
 
{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Change log:
{
{  1 Dec 81   max number of users.  This will allow the entire
{ file to fit into a single disk block.
{ }

{  5-Mar-81  V1.0  Don Scelza  V1.2    Brad Myers
{   Set Ether10MBaud to false.

{ 04 Nov 81     V1.1    Don Scelza
{   Set Ether10MBaud to true.
{
{-
{ Created UserPass
{ }


{********************} Exports {********************}

type IDType  = 0..255;

    PassType =----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


exports


const Ether3MBaud = False;       ^Integer;              { a two word value }
    
    UserRecord = packed record
            InUse: boolean;                        { no support for 3 MBaud EtherNet }
      Ether10MBaud = True;            { no support for 10 MBaud EtherNet }


typ{ is this entry in use. }
            Name: String[31];              { Name of the user }
            UserID: IDType;         {********************}
                                                                                                        e Double = array[0..1] of Integer;


private
                                                                                      	
                          NumBlksInUse says how many
                                                  data blocks are actually  {when booting, the boot character is indexed into
                           the following tables to find where code to be
  used
                                                  by the segment}
                          LastBlk    : FSBit16;  {Logi                          boot loaded is found }

                          BootTable  : array [0..25] of DiskAddr; {qcode}
 cal Block Number of 
                                                  largest block allocated}
                          Last                         InterpTable: array [0..25] of DiskAddr; {microcode}
                          PartName   : packed arra                of the blocks that form the file.
                           It has three parts as noted above.  Notice
      Addr   : DiskAddr; {DiskAddr of LastBlk }
                          LastNegBlk : FSBit16;  {Logical Block Number of
                               that all three parts are always there, so
                           that even in a very large file, the f                                        largest pointer block
                                                  allocated}
   irst
                           DIRECTSIZE blocks can be located quickly
                           The blocks in the Random i                       LastNegAddr: DiskAddr  {Block number of LastNegBlk}
                        );
 {5 is the format of thendex have logical
                           block numbers that are negative.  The logical
                           block nu DiskInformationBlock}
                      5: (
                          
                          {The Free List is a chmber of Indirect[0] is -2 (the FIB is -1)
                           the last possible block's number is 
                    ain of free blocks linked
                          by their headers }

                          FreeHead   : DiskAddr; {Hin       -(INDSIZE+DBLINBDSIZE+1)}

                          Direct     : array [0..DIRECTSIZE-1] of DiskAddr;
               t of Block Number of the
                                                  head of the free list}
                          Fr           Indirect   : array [0..INDSIZE-1]    of DiskAddr;
                          DblInd     : array [0..DBLINDSIZE-1] of eeTail   : DiskAddr; {Hint of Block Number of the
                                                  tail of the free list}
   DiskAddr;
                          
                          SegKind    : SpiceSegKind;
                          
                              NumFree    : FSBit32;  {Hint of how many blocks
                                                  are on                   NumBlksInUse : integer; {segments can have gaps, 
                                                  block n  the free list}
                          RootDirID  : SegID;    {where to find the Root
                                     may exist when block 
                                                  n-1 has never been allocated.
                                     Directory}
                          BadSegID   : SegID;    {where the bad segment is}

                          	
       { The user ID of the user. }
            GroupID: IDType;               { The group ID of the user. }
            Encry{  Normal progress ignore window boundary.
{  Use time to initialize Busy.
{ }

{   6 Jan 82 1.15  Brad Myers
{  Keep busy ptPass: PassType;         { The encrypted password. }
            Profile: String;               { Path name of the profile filcursor in window.
{ }

{  29-Dec-81 1.14  Brad Myers
{  Add busy procedures for when busy but don't know how long until donee. }
        end;


function FindUser(UserName: String;  var UserRec: UserRecord): Boolean;
function ValidUser( UserName, P.
{ }

{   2-Dec-81 1.13  John Strait
{  1) Use type Long instead of FSBit32 from Arith.
{  2) Reset default cursor in Quitassword: String;  var UserRec: UserRecord): Boolean;
function AddUser(UserName, Password: String;  Group: IDType;  
          Progress.
{ }

{  28-Sep-81 1.12  John Strait
{  Use long arithmetic in a new routine so that when the number of steps
{  i       ProPath: String): Boolean;
procedure NewUserFile;
procedure ListUsers;
function RemoveUser(UserName: String): boolean;s larger than 1024 we can show finer grain.
{ }

{  31-Aug-81 1.11  John Strait
{  Show finer grain for Stream files.  This 

const PassFile = '>System.Users';

const MaxUsers = 10;

type Users = array[0..MaxUsers] of UserRecord;




{******means that UtilProgress now
{  uses long arithmetic.
{ }

{  31-Aug-81 1.10  John Strait
{  Add stuff to show progress read**************} Private {********************}
                                                                                ing Stream files.
{ }

{  19-May-81 1.9  Brad Myers
{  New IO module name.
{ }

{  9-Mar-81 1.8  Don Scelza
{  Changed m odule name and added code to 
{  allow the user to specify the number of scan lines.
{ }

{ 20-Feb-81 1.7  Brad A. Myers 
{  New cursor
{ }

{  2-Jan-81  1.6  Miles A. Barel
{ Initial Creation
{ }

Exports
    Procedure LoadCurs;
    Procedur e ShowProgress(NumLines: Integer);
    Procedure QuitProgress;
    Procedure StreamProgress( var F: File );
    Procedure ComModule UtilProgress;
{-----------------------------------
{
{ Progress Reporting Routines
{ Copyright (C) 1981  Three RiversputeProgress( Current, Max: Integer );
    Procedure LoadBusy;

Private
                                                     Computer Corporation
{
{ Abstract:
{    Routines to show progress of utilities.
{
{------------------------------------}
 
{  18 Jan 82 1.16  Brad Myers
{  Busy cursor bounce off borders.
{  Start progress at top.
{  QuitProgress set function.
    	
 hint to a candidate
                                          for the FreeHead}
                   PrevAdr   : DiskAddr; {Dis                                significant bits for the 12
                                                   or 24 megabyte dk Address of the next block in
                                          this segment}
                   NextAdr   : DiskAddrisks.  The
                                                   lower byte of the lower word
                                   ; {Disk Address of the previous block in
                                          this segment}
                 end;

                    is always zero (since a disk
                                                   address is a page address,
   ptrHeader  = ^Header;
    
    DiskCommand= (DskRead, DskWrite, DskFirstWrite, DskReset, DskHdrRead,
                      Ds                                                which is 256 words
                                                  }


funkHdrWrite);  {last ones for error reporting}

var
    DiskSegment : integer;               {a memory segment for DiskIO}
   ction FieldToAddr(disk: integer; fld : integer) : DiskAddr;
                                                  { Makes a DiskAdd                  
procedure InitDiskIO;  {initialize DiskIO, called at boot time}

procedure ZeroBuffer(ptr : ptrDiskBuffer)r out of a
                                                    short address and a disk
                                      y [1..8] of char;
                          PartStart  : DiskAddr;
                          PartEnd    : DiskAddr;
         ;  {write zeroes in all words of the
                                            buffer. When reading an unallocated
                          SubParts   : array [0..63] of DiskAddr;
                          PartRoot   : DiskAddr;
                                                       block, Zeros are returned in the
                                            buffer}

func      PartKind   : PartitionType;
                          PartDevice : DeviceType
                        );
 {6 is the fortion WhichDisk(addr : DiskAddr) : integer;  {Tells you which disk number a
                                                 Dismat of a block of a Directory}
                     6: (
                          Entry      : array [0..FILESPERDIRBLK-1] ofkAddr is on}

function AddrToField(addr : DiskAddr) : integer;  {gives you a one word short
                                  DirEntry
                        )
                  end;
                  
    ptrDiskBuffer = ^DiskBuffer;
    
    He                  address by taking the lower
                                                   byte of the upper word and
  ader     = packed record           {format of a block header}
                   SerialNum : DiskAddr; {Actually has the SegID                                                  the upper byte of the lower
                                                  of the file}
                   LogBlock  : integer;  {logical block number}
                   Filler    : integer;  {holds a word.  The upper byte of the
                                                   upper word can't have any
                     	
 Fix bug where MMFirst was getting trashed by SwapIn.
{ }

{ 28 May 81  V2.3  BAM
{ New light.
{ }

{ 26 May 81  V2.2  JP character used in booting).
{ }

{ 18 Feb 81  V1.5  JPS
{ Define fields in the SIT to remember names of boot loaded segmentS
{ Show swapping with a "light".
{ }

{ 21 May 81  V2.1  JPS
{ Fix various serious bugs in SwapIn procedure.
{ Delete sevs.
{ Remove most of InitMemory since it is done now by MakeBoot.  Make IOSeg
{ a constant.
{ }

{ 17 Feb 81  V1.4  DAS
{ Reral unused variables in various procedures.
{ }

{ 12 May 81  V2.0  JPS
{ 1) Split Memory into two modules: Memory (user caemoved the include file SegNumbers.  Placed the segment number
{ definitions inline.
{ }

{ 16 Feb 81  V1.3  DAS
{ Changed module Virtual;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Virtual - Perq virtullable routines, swappable)
{    and Virtual (system callable routines, unswappable).
{ 2) Move FileIdToSegId and SegIdToFileIal memory manager.
{       J. P. Strait        1 Jan 80.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.
{
{ d into Virtual.
{ 3) Use exceptions rather than MemoryError.
{ }

{ 24 Mar 81  V1.9  JPS
{ Begin adding stuff for virtual mAbstract:
{       Virtual is the Perq virtual memory manager.  It supervises the
{       segment tables and exports proceduresemory.
{ }

{ 23 Mar 81  V1.8  JPS
{ Convert to standard documentation form.
{ Delete DEBUG stuff.
{ Delete OutputF.
{ Ad for swapping memory segments.
{       Virtual is the portion of the Perq memory manager which must remain
{       memory resid "MM" to the beginning of names which are exported but are not needed by
{ programs which import the memory manager.
{ Removedent at all times.
{       Perq physical memory is segmented into separately swappable items
{       (called segments) which m Concat call from MemoryError.
{ Remove import of Perq.String.
{ }

{ 24 Feb 81  V1.7  JPS
{ 1) Allow the ScreenSeg to chanay contain either code or data.
{
{ Design:
{       See the Q-Code reference manual.
{
{-----------------------------------ge sizes.  To allow this, the memory
{    manager must prevent system segments (those with RefCount > 1) from
{    being moved------------------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 into the area of memory which might be used for the
{    screen.  This is a hack which guarantees that the system can expand
{ Change Log:
{
{  13 Jan 82  V2.8  Brad Myers (found by JPS)
{    Handler for XStackOverflow in SwapIn and SwapOut

{ 10 D{    the screen to its original size after returning from a user program.
{    This change was originally made by RFR, but had ec 81  V2.7  WJHansen
{    change to use long arithmetic for xxTime;  remove Arith

{ 25 Oct 81  V2.6  JPS
{ Changes to agreto be converted for
{    memory manager version 1.5 and greater.
{ 2) Remove PrintTable and PrintFreeList.
{ }

{ 23 Feb 81e with V2.11 Memory.
{ }

{ 24 Sep 81 V2.5  WJH
{ When delete a segment, make it swappable.
{ }

{ 3 Jul 81  V2.4  JPS
{  V1.6  RFR
{ Added DK and CH to system boot record (they will be filled by the boot
{ microcode with the disk number and boot   	
}


function LogAddrToPhysAddr(addr : DiskAddr) : DiskAddr;
                                      {translate a Logical Disk                if error occurred
                                      }

Exception DiskFailure(msg: String; operation: DiskCAddress (used
                                       throughout the system) to and from a
                                    ommand; addr: DiskAddr;
                       softStat: integer);
Exception DiskError(msg: String);
Exception BadDevice;

   physical Disk Address (the kind the disk
                                       contoller sees) Logical Disk Addresses
    
Var ErrorCnt : Array[IOEFirstError..IOELastError] of integer;


{******************} private {***************************}                                   use a sequential numbering system
                                       Physical Disk Addre
                                                                                                                              sses have a
                                       Cylinder-Head-Sector system This routine
                                        calls MapAddr (a private routine which
                                       does the translation) Map Addr
                                        implements interlace algorithm}

function PhysAddrToLogAddr(disk : integer; addr : DiskAddr) : Disk Addr;

function LastDiskAddr(DevType : DeviceType) : DiskAddr; {Gets the Disk Address
                                       module Dynamic;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Dynamic - Perq dynam                  of the last possible
                                                         page on the device}


functiic memory allocation and de-allocation.
{       J. P. Strait      1 Jan 80.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corpor              number
                                                  }


procedure DiskIO(addr : DiskAddr; ptr : ptrDiskBuon NumberPages(DevType : DeviceType) : FSBit32;  {Return the number of
                                                        ffer; 
                 hptr : ptrHeader; dskcommand : DiskCommand); {Do a disk
                                              pages on a device}


procedure DiskReset;  {Reset the disk controller and recalibrate the actuater}

function TryDiskIO(add                 operation, if
                                                               errors occur,
                  r : DiskAddr;  ptr : ptrDiskBuffer;
                   hptr : ptrHeader;  dskcommand : DiskCommand;
                   numTrie                                             exits via
                                                               DiskErrors: integer) : boolean;
                                      {Try a disk operation, but, return false
                          	
edure MakeEdge( var E: MMEdge; S: SegmentNumber );
 procedure DeleteSegment( var S: SegmentNumber );
 procedure SwapOut( var E : MMEdge );
 procedure SwapIn( E: MMEdge; S: SegmentNumber; P: MMPosition );
 procedure Compact;
 procedure KeepSegments;
 p rocedure FindHole( Fsize: MMIntSize; ForUserSegment: Boolean );
 procedure IncIOCount( S: SegmentNumber );
 procedure DecIOCoumodule Writer;


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Writer - Stream pnt( S: SegmentNumber );
 procedure SwapSegmentsIn( S1, S2, S3, S4: SegmentNumber );
 


var ScreenLast: Integer;
    Keep1ackage output conversion routines.
{       J. P. Strait   ca. 1 Jan 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporatio, Keep2, Keep3, Keep4: SegmentNumber;
    Kludge: record case Integer of
             1: (A: DiskAddress);
             2: (Dn, 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
{       Writer is the character output module of the Stream package.  It
{       is called by code ge: Double)
             end;
    BlockHeader: IOHeadPtr;
    BlockAddress: Double;
    BlockSId: SegId;
    Status: IOStatPtnerated by the Pascal compiler in response to
{       a Write or Writeln.  It is one level above Module Stream and uses
{     to use Perq_String from Perq.String
{ }

{ 11 Feb 81        DCF
{ Changed calls to PString to conform to new PString.  This r;
    BootSerialNum: Double;
    BootSegId: SegId;
    SwapSId: SegId;

 
 
private
                                   module is
{ compatable with the new System and Compiler.
{ }

{ 13 Jan 81  V1.2  JPS
{ 1) Allocate the IOSeg in memory mana{ VRD Definitions.
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       VRD.Dfs - Variablger initialization as a locked
{    segment at the high end of memory.  Use the last block in memory (the
{    Krnl no longer e routine descriptor definitions.
{       J. P. Strait   10 Dec 80.
{       Copyright (c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1needs it).
{ 2) Move $R- to private part.
{ }

{ 10 Oct 80  V1.1  JPS
{ Add support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
{ }980.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This file defines offsets within Variable Routine Descriptors (VRD's).
{
{----------------------
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports


const VirtualVersion = '2.8';-------------------------------------------------------}

{ 10 Dec 80  1.0  J. P. Strait.
{ Start file.
{ }

        VRD


imports Memory from Memory;
imports IO_Unit from IO_Unit;
imports DiskIO from DiskIO;

          
 function  ReturnSegSN = 0;     { segment number }
        VRDGP = 1;     { global pointer }
        VRDRN = 2;     { routine number }
        VRment: SegmentNumber;
 procedure ReleaseSegmentNumber( Seg: SegmentNumber );
 function  NewSegmentNumber: SegmentNumber;
 procDSL = 3;     { static link }
        VRDSize = 4;   { size of a VRD }
                                                           	
 of a given size with a given alignment may be allocated from
{       any data segment.  If the data segment is full (doesn't c{ EEB Definitions.
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       EEB.Dfs - Exceptiontain
{       enough free memory to allocate), the segment is increased in
{       multiples of the segment's increment size on enable block definitions.
{       J. P. Strait   10 Dec 80.
{       Copyright (c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.until there is enough
{       free memory to allocate.  Similarly, memory that was once allocated
{       may be deallocated.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This file defines offsets within the Exception Enable Blocks
{       (EEB's) in the Perq memory stack.
{
{ Design:
{       Free memory within each segment is linked into a circular freelist
{       in order of address.  Each fr  Only the routine number of the
{       handler is required (not a full variable routine descriptor)
{       because the handee node is at least two words long and
{       is of the form
{
{       record Next:   Integer;
{              Length: Integler is guaranteed to be nested immediately
{       inside of the routine which enabled it.  The handler's segment
{       number;
{              Rest:   2*Length - 2 words
{              end;
{
{       Where Next*2 is the address of the next free noder is the same as the enabler's segment number, the handler's
{       static link is the enabler's activation pointer, and thee and Length*2 is the
{       number of free words.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------------
{       handler's global pointer is the same as the enabler's global
{       pointer.
{
{------------------------------------------}


{ 26 Oct 81  V1.4  JPS
{ Make certain that the segment passed to NewP and DisposeP is a data segment.
{ }

{ ------------------------------------------}

{ 10 Dec 80  1.0  J. P. Strait.
{ Start file.
{ }

        EEBES     = 0;  12 May 81  V1.3  JPS
{ Use exceptions rather than MemoryError.
{ }

{ 23 Mar 81  V1.2  JPS
{ Convert to standard documentat { exception segment number }
        EEBER     = 1;   { exception routine number }
        EEBHR     = 2;   { handler routineion form.
{ }

{ 13 Jan 81  V1.1  JPS
{ Fix assignment of nil in New and Dispose.
{ Change bad constant #200000 to #100000. number }
        EEBNE     = 3;   { next exception pointer }
        EEBLength = 4;   { size of an EEB }
                   
{ Move $R- to private part.
{ }

exports


const DynamicVersion = '1.4';


imports Memory from Memory;


 procedu re NewP( S: SegmentNumber; A: integer; var P: MMPointer; L: integer );
 procedure DisposeP( var P: MMPointer; L: integer );

 ation, 1980, 1981,1982.
{
{ Abstract:
{       Dynamic implements Pascal dynamic allocation - New and Dispose.
{       Memory
private
                                                                                                                       	
teCh( Var F: FileType; X: char; Field: integer );
 procedure WriteChArray( var F: FileType; var X: ChArray; Max, Field: integerHERS.PAS
Get IOPRIV.PAS           IO_PRIVATE.PAS
Get IOUNIT.PAS           IO_UNIT.PAS
Get LIGHTS.PAS           LIGHTS.PAS
Ge );
 procedure WriteIdentifier( var F: FileType; X: integer; 
                            var IT: IdentTable; L, Field: integet LOADER.PAS           LOADER.PAS
Get MEMORY.PAS           MEMORY.PAS
Get MOVEME.PAS           MOVEMEM.PAS
Get MULTIR.PAS    r );
 procedure WriteInteger( var F: FileType; X: integer; Field: integer );
 procedure WriteString( var F: FileType; var X: S       MULTIREAD.PAS
Get PASLON.PAS           PASLONG.PAS
Get PASREA.PAS           PASREAL.PAS
Get PERQST.PAS           PERQ_tring; Field: integer );
 procedure WriteX( var F: FileType; X, Field, B: integer );


private
                            STRING.PAS
Get PMATCH.PAS           PMATCH.PAS
Get POPCMD.PAS           POPCMDPARSE.PAS
Get POPUP.PAS            POPUP.PAS
GSides 2
Density SINGLE
Fast


! OS.NOSOURCE.SOURCE  - OPERATING SYSTEM NONSOURCE FILES
! Created 12 Feb 82 14:14:01

Getet POPUPC.PAS           POPUPCURS.PAS
Get PROFILE.PAS          PROFILE.PAS
Get RANDOM.PAS           RANDOMNUMBERS.PAS
Get RAS ACB.DFS              ACB.DFS
Get ALLOCD.PAS           ALLOCDISK.PAS
Get ARITH.PAS            ARITH.PAS
Get CLOCK.PAS        TER.PAS           RASTER.PAS
Get RD.DFS               RD.DFS
Get READDI.PAS           READDISK.PAS
Get READER.PAS           R    CLOCK.PAS
Get CMDPAR.PAS           CMDPARSE.PAS
Get CODE.PAS             CODE.PAS
Get CONTRO.PAS           CONTROLSTORE.PEADER.PAS
Get REALFU.PAS           REALFUNCTIONS.PAS
Get RS232B.PAS           RS232BAUD.PAS
Get RUNREA.PAS           RUNREAD.AS
Get DISKIO.PAS           DISKIO.PAS
Get DYNAMI.PAS           DYNAMIC.PAS
Get EEB.DFS              EEB.DFS
Get EDITK.PAR  PAS
Get RUNWRI.PAS           RUNWRITE.PAS
Get SCREEN.PAS           SCREEN.PAS
Get SCROUN.PAS           SCROUNGE.PAS
Get SHEL          EDITORK.PARAS
Get ETHER1.PAS           ETHER10IO.PAS
Get EXCEPT.PAS           EXCEPT.PAS
Get EXCEPT.DFS           EL.PAR            SHELL.PARAS
Get STREAM.PAS           STREAM.PAS
Get SYSTEM.PAS           SYSTEM.PAS
Get SYSDEF.PAS            Stream's output routines.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ 4 Jun 81XCEPT.DFS
Get FILEAC.PAS           FILEACCESS.PAS
Get FILEDE.PAS           FILEDEFS.PAS
Get FILEDI.PAS           FILEDIR.PAS  V2.2  John Strait.
{ Add Virgil headers and comments.
{ }

{ 19 May 81  V2.1  Brad Myers.
{ Turn off Range checking so pr
Get FILESY.PAS           FILESYSTEM.PAS
Get FILETY.PAS           FILETYPES.PAS
Get FILEUT.PAS           FILEUTILS.PAS
Get GEinting of chArrays will work.
{ }

{ 12 May 81  V2.0  John Strait.
{ Use exceptions rather than StreamError.
{ }

exportTTIM.PAS           GETTIMESTAMP.PAS
Get GPIB.PAS             GPIB.PAS
Get IO.PAS               IO.PAS
Get IOERRO.PAS         s


imports Stream from Stream;

 
 procedure WriteBoolean( var F: FileType; X: Boolean; Field: integer );
 procedure Wri  IOERRORS.PAS
Get IOERRM.PAS           IOERRMESSAGES.PAS
Get IOINIT.PAS           IO_INIT.PAS
Get IOOTHE.PAS           IO_OT   	
 the definitions from
{   the program TestEther.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------------- Receive completes the
{ next Receive in the chain is started.
{
{ Command information for the Ethernet driver is provided in}



  
{********************} Exports {********************} 


{----------------------------------------------------- an
{ Ethernet Device Control Block, DCB.  All data areas referenced by
{ pointers in the DCB as well as the DCB itself must bmodule Ether10IO;

{------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This module ------------------
{
{ This module provides the raw I/O interface to the Three Rivers Computer
{ Ethernet system.  The procedprovides the client interface to the 10 Mbaud Ethernet
{   microcode.
{
{ Written by: Don Scelza
{
{ Copyright (C) Three Riures in this module allow the client to
{ send and receive packets on the net.
{
{ For details of the  Physical and Data Linkvers Computer Corporation, 1981
{
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------}



{------- layers of the network 
{ see the document:
{
{   The Ethernet
{   A Local Area Network
{   Data Link Layer and Physical La-------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Change History:
{
{ 28 jan 82     Version 1.8     Sayer Specifications
{
{   DEC - Intel - XEROX
{
{ For details on the Three Rivers hardware interface to the network see:
{
ndeep Johar
{   Etherheaders aligned at 8 word boundaries.
{
{ 30 dec 81     Version 1.7     Don Scelza
{   Made changes to {   Ethernet Interface Programmers Guide
{
{   Pradeep Reddy
{
{ For details on the interface presented, to this module, by allow for Back-off on transmit.
{ 
{ 17 Nov 81     Version 1.6     Don Scelza
{   Added the exception E10ReceiveDone.  Georgethe
{ Ethernet microcode see the file:
{
{   Ether10.Micro
{
{   Donald A. Scelza
{
{ Following is some general informati R. needed this to implement
{   IP/TCP
{
{ 09 Nov 81     Version 1.5     Don Scelza
{   Made some changed in the IO routineon about the client interface
{ presented by the Ethernet microcode and this module:
{
{ It is possible to always have a rece.  Changed the way that
{   DCBs are linked.
{
{ 05 Nov 81     Version 1.4      Don Scelza
{   Changed to look at the constaive pending.  If a send command
{ is executed while a receive is pending the internal state of the
{ interface is saved in a rnt UseSys.
{ 
{ 04 Nov 81     Version 1.3     Don Scelza
{   Took out some code to create the module EtherInterrupt.
{
{ 02egister save area in memory.  This is
{ done by saving the VA of the DCB for the receive. After the
{ send has completed the r Nov 81     Version 1.2     Don Scelza
{   Implemented the changes from the design review.
{
{ 29 Oct 81     Version 1.1     eceive state is reloaded and the receive is
{ restarted.
{ 
{ In addition to the ability to do a Receive followed by a Send, Don Scelza
{   Started to add code to the module.
{
{ 02 Oct 81     Version 1.0     Don Scelza
{   Created the module.  Tookit is
{ also possible to do multiple Receives.  The Receives are linked using
{ the NextDCB field of the Ethernet DCB.  When a  	
UAL.PAS
Get VRD.DFS              VRD.DFS
Get WRITER.PAS           WRITER.PAS
                                                Shell                                               Copyright 1982, 3RCC
           Commands and keywords
           
$FileUtmodule PasReal;

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{     PasReal -  Scott L. ilities - Index of information on using files
$Program       - Index of how to write and run programs
$Devices       - Index oBrown     Created: 25-Nov-81
{     Copyright (C) 1981 - Three Rivers Computer Corporation 
{ 
{ Abstract:
{
{     PasReal if information on using various devices
$Microcode     - Index on nitty-gritty

%Notation Conventions
%Introduction

%? - Ss an extra character input module of the Stream package.
{     Its routines are called by code generated by the Pascal compilerhow command names
%Bye - Stop using Perq
%Details - Show details of system environment
%Editor - Edit a text file
%FindStrin 
{     in response to variations on Read, Readln, Write and Writeln 
{     statements. It is one level above Module Stream ang - Search multiple files for a given string
%Help - Give explanations of programs or keywords
%Login - Start using Perq

%Pd uses Stream's
{     lower-level input routines.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------------ause - Stop execution until RETURN
%Perq.Files - Software Index maintenance program
%ScreenSize - Shrink screen for next execu-----}


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ ChangeLog:
{
{ 26-jan-82  V0tion
%SetTime - Change current time
%Statistics - Turn on or off the display of execution statistics
%UserControl - Maintain .1a  Scott L. Brown
{ Modified to raise the exception NotReal instead of NotNumber (in ReadR).
{
{ 25-Nov-81  V0.0   Scott L.the list of users allowed on the Perq
FileUtilities>FileUtilities.Index
File Utilities
                Commands and keywords Brown
{ Creation of real read and write routines ReadR and WriteR.
{
{------------------------------------------------------

%Append - Add one file to the end of another
%Copy - Copy a file to another name
%Delete - Remove a file
%Directory - Sho-----------------------}


exports

 imports Stream from Stream;

 

 procedure ReadR(var F: FileType;
              w what files exist
%DirTree - Show directory structure as a tree
%Dismount - Discontinue use of device
%ExpandTabs - Change T   var value: real);

 procedure WriteR(var F: FileType;
                      e: real;
                      TotalWidth: inABs to multiple spaces
%MakeDir - Create a new directory
%Mount - Start using device
%Partition - Reorganize disk
%Patch - Mteger;
                      FracDigits: integer;
                      format: integer);


private
                     odify a disk block
%Path - Change to another directory
%Rename - Change the name of a file
%Scavenger - Recover disk if file  SYSTEMDEFS.PAS
Get USERPA.PAS           USERPASS.PAS
Get UTILPR.PAS           UTILPROGRESS.PAS
Get VIRTUA.PAS           VIRT    	

{ bits that were received.  To translate this into the number of data
{ bytes you must perform a number of operations.  First        { 0 - receive has finished.  1 for trans. }
        Busy:       boolean;        { The interface is bust. }
        UnU divide it by 8.
{ This will give the number of bytes that were received.  If the number
{ is not evenly divisible by 8 then tsed4:    boolean;
        ClockOver:  boolean;        { The microsecond clock overflowed. }
        PIP:        boolean;      here was a transmissintializeon error.
{ After the division you must subtract the number of bytes in the
{ header and the CRC.  { There is a Packet In Progress. }
        Carrier:    boolean;        { There is traffic on the net. }
        RetryTime:    There is a total of 20 bytes in these two portions
{ of the packet.
{
{----------------------------------------------------0..15;
        UnUsed12:   boolean;
        UnUsed13:   boolean;
        SendError:  boolean;        { Could not send packet --------------------}


imports SystemDefs from SystemDefs;
imports System from System;


{
{ Define the types and variafter 16 tries. }
        CmdInProg:  boolean;        { There is a command pending. } 
        BitsRecv:   integer;        { Ne LOCKED in
{ memory until the request has completed.  They can NOT be moved.
{ The best way to do this is to mark the segmentables used by the Network stuff.
{ }

type
    
    {
    { These are the valid commands for the Ethernet interface.
     that the buffers are
{ allocated from as UnMovable.  This will allow the memory manager to
{ place the buffers in a convient { }

    EtherCommand = (EReset, EReceive, EPromiscuousReceive, ESend);

    {
    { An Ethernet address is 48 bits long.  place in memory before they are
{ locked down.
{
{ The Ethernet driver needs to have a four (4) word area of memory in whichIt is made up of 6
    { octets or in our case 3 words.
    { }

    EtherAddress = packed record   { An address on the net 
{ it can save registers.  A pointer to this area of memory is provided
{ by the BuffPtr when a Reset command is executed.  Oncis 48 bits }
        High: integer;
        Mid:  integer;
        Low:  integer;
        end;
    
    {
    { This recoe the Reset
{ command has been processed this register save area can NOT be moved.
{ To change the register save area another rd defines an Ethernet status block.  The first
    { 15 bits of the block are defined by the hardware interface.
    { The 16Reset command must be
{ executed.
{
{ The Ethernet DCB must be unmovable while the command is pending. 
{
{ To wait for theth bit of the first word and the second word are defined by the
    { Ethernet microcode.
    {
    { Alignment:    Double wo completion of a command it is possible to spin on the
{ Command-In-Progress bit in the status block.  This bit will be clearedrd.
    { Locked:       Yes.
    { }

    EtherStatus = packed record     { The status record. }
        CRCError:   boolea
{ when the requested command has been completed.
{
{
{ After a receive the Bits field of the status block has the number ofn;        { There was a CRC error.}
        Collision:  boolean;        { There was a collision }
        RecvTrans:  boolean;  	
escriptions of the commands given in this  manual  observe  the
following notational conventions:


     o  Lowercase text iribes  the action the system performs or the
name of the utility that performs the  action.   When  submitting  a
command  thandicates a variable whose actual value is
        determined when the command is entered


     o  Square brackets ([]) indit  is  implemented  in  the Shell, you need not type the
entire command name; you can abbreviate  the  command  name  to  the
structures damaged
%SetSearch - Change list of directories to search for files
%TypeFile - Rapidly display a file
Program>Prcate optional entries in a command
        line.  Note that when an option is used, the brackets are
        not part of the sogram.Index
Creating and running programs
                                Commands and Keywords

%Compile - Run the PASCAL cyntax.


     o  The circumflex (^^) indicates the control key


     o  CR indicates carriage return


     o  SHIFT iompiler
%Debugger - The preliminary debugger
%Linker - Combine compiler outputs for execution
%ReRun - Use new arguments and ndicates the shift key
Introduction
Introduction



This  manual  describes the PERQ Utility Programs and explains theirre-execute last program run
%Run - Execute a program
Devices>Devices.Index
Using Various devices
                        Co
use.  As required, the  manual  references  online  or  other  Three
Rivers Computer Corporation publications.

Most  of  thmmands and Keywords

%Chatter - Talk over RS232 line
%Floppy - Do file operations on floppy disks
%FTP - Transfer files to ae  commands  described in this manual are implemented as
Pascal files, but some are implemented directly by the Shell.

To isnother computer
%Print - Print a file to GPIB or RS232
%SetBaud - Change baud rate on RS232
MicroCode>MicroCode.Index
Microsue a command, type a command line in response to  the  default
PERQ  prompt.   You  can also use a pop-up menu, as described iCode
             Commands and Keywords

%MakeBoot - Enable booting a new system
%ODTPRQ - Debug microcode across a Link
%Pn the
PERQ Introductory User Manual, to issue Shell commands.

If you elect to use a pop-up menu, the  menu  displays  all  oRQMic - Microcode assembler
%PRQPlace - Combine microcode and assign addresses
%QDis - Display the QCodes in a compiled .SEG ff  the
valid  commands.   Use the pointing tablet to specify the selection.
The FLOPPY  and  FTP  utilities  also  permit  youile
%Swap - Turn swapping on or off

Notation
Notation Conventions.




This manual describes the PERQ Utility Program  to  enter  their
respective  commands  through  pop-up menus; a press of the pointing
tablet in response to either of  the  s and commands to  the
Shell.   The  command descriptions are in alphabetical order regard-
less of whether the command is  imprompts  for  these  utilities
displays a menu for the utility commands.

If  you  type  a  command line, the line consists oplemented  as  a  Pascal  file  or
through  the  Shell directly (The Introductory User Manual describes
the Shell.)


The df a command name,
input and output arguments as needed, optional switches, and a  line
terminator.

The  command  name  desc   	
.
    { }

    pEtherStatus = ^EtherStatus;
    pEtherBuffer = ^EtherBuffer;
    pEtherHeader = ^EtherHeader; 
    pEtherD
        UnUsed0:   boolean;
        UnUsed1:   boolean;
        UnUsed2:   boolean;
        UnUsed3:   boolean;
        UnCB = ^EtherDCB; 

    {
    { This is the definition of an Ethernet Device Control Block.
    {
    { Alignment:    Quad woUsed4:   boolean;
        UnUsed5:   boolean;
        UnUsed6:   boolean;
        UnUsed7:   boolean;
        UnUsed8:   boord.
    { Locked:       Yes.
    { } 


    EtherDCB = packed record
        HeadPtr:    pEtherHeader;
        BuffPtr:  lean;
        UnUsed9:   boolean;
        UnUsed10:  boolean;
        UnUsed11:  boolean;
        UnUsed12:  boolean;
       pEtherBuffer;
        StatPtr:    pEtherStatus;
        Cmd:        EtherCommand;
        BitCnt:     Integer;            {   UnUsed13:  boolean;
        UnUsed14:  boolean;
        CmdInProg: boolean;
        end;

    puSClkDCB = ^uSClkDCB;    Total bits in buffer and header }
        NextDCB:    pEtherDCB;
        end;

    {
    { This is the definition that is 



{
{ Define the constants for the address block supplied to Three Rivers by
{ Xerox.
{
{ High 16 bits (2 octets) are used to create the register save
    { area.  
    {
    { Alignment:    Double word.
    { Locked:       Yes.
    { }
   02 1C (Hex).
{ Next 8 bits (1 octet) is 7C (Hex).
{
{ The low order byte of the second PERQ word as well as the third PERQ wo 
    EtherRegSave = record
        RecvDCB:    pEtherDCB;
        SendDcb:    pEtherDCB;
        end;
    
    pEtherRegSrd
{ are Three Rivers defined.  Currently the low order byte of the second word
{ is used to define the type of interface.  Thave = ^EtherRegSave;


    
    {
    { Following are the definitions that are used to deal with the
    { micro-second cle valid values are:
{
{       0 - Interface is on an IO option board.
{       1 - Interface is on the IO board
{ }
 

conumber of bits that were received. }
        end;
    
    {
    { This record defines the header for an Ethernet transfer.
ock.
    { }

    {
    { The microsecond clock takes a two word combined control and
    { status block.  The first word o    {
    { Alignment:    8 word.
    { Locked:       Yes.
    { }

    EtherHeader = packed record
        Dest:       Etf the block gives the number
    { of microseconds to be loaded into the clock.
    { The second word provides the status infoherAddress;
        Src:        EtherAddress;
        EType:      Integer;        { Type field defined by XEROX } 
        enrmation from the
    { clock.  Once a clock command has been started it is
    { possible to spin on the CmdInProgress bit in d;
 
    {
    { This record provides the definition of an EtherBuffer.
    { 
    { Alignment:    1k word.
    { Locked: the control
    { block.  When the bit is cleared the specified number of
    { micro-seconds has elapsed.
    {
    { Align      Yes.
    { }

    EtherBuffer = array [0..749] of integer; 
    
    {
    { Define all of the pointers that we needment:    Double word.
    { Locked:       Yes.
    { }

type
    
    uSClkDCB = packed record
        uSeconds: integer;  	
he above command is:

     RENAME OLDFILE ~ NEWFILE

              or

     RENAME OLDFILE NEWFILE

You can mix formats;itch (either
type /HELP or  press  the  HELP  key);  when  specified  before  the
command,  the  Help  switch  supplies  gener the utility prompts for whatever you omit.  For
example:

      RENAME OLDFILE
      Rename OLDFILE to:  NEWFILE

There  al  information and when
specified  after  a  command,  the  Help  switch  provides  specific
information.   Switches  always are  no  defaults  for  prompts.  You must supply a response.
However, your response to the prompt can request help (type /HELP start  with  a  slash  (/)  and are
generally optional.  If a switch accepts a  parameter,  specify  the
parameter  after the or
press  the  HELP  key).   If  you request HELP, the utility displays
specific information and then exits to the Shell.

 switch, but preceded by an equal sign (=).  For
example:

     /switch=parameter

The effect of a switch is global; regardIf you neglect to supply an argument to  a  utility  that  uses  the
default  file  (for  example,  the  Editor  or  Linker), tless  of  where  the  switch
appears  on  the  command  line,  it  has the same effect.  A switch
applies to every argument.  number  of  letters unique to other command names.  For example, the
Mount command can be abbreviated M because it is  the  onlhe utility
appends the default file name to your command.  For example, if  the
default file is sys:user>myfile, typing the coy  command
within  the Shell beginning with that character.  You can abbreviate
the Path command to Pat, but not Pa because thmmand:

     EDIT

is the same as typing:

     Edit sys:user>myfile


If  a  command  requires  an  input  and an outpe Shell  includes  the
Pause  command.  The question mark command (see section 3) lists all
commands.  You can modify the listut argument, you can
specify the arguments as either

     INPUT~OUTPUT

          or

     INPUT OUTPUT

You can separ by changing your profile file.

Input and output arguments further define the command  action.   The
input  and  output  argate  the  input  and  output  arguments  with  multiple
spaces; only the initial space delimiter is relevant.

However,  if  uments  are  usually  file  specifiers.  Some
commands require arguments as  part  of  the  command  line.   Other
commands  ua  command accepts multiple input or output arguments,
you must separate like arguments with  commas  (,)  and  distinguish
inse  the default file as the argument if you do not supply
one.

If you neglect to supply a required argument,  the  utility  put from output with the tilda character (~).  For example:

     input1,input2,...inputn ~ output1.output2,...outputn

If  prompts
with  a  few  words  indicating  the  general  nature of the missing
argument.  For example, the Rename command perfora  command  accepts  multiple  input  arguments  and  no  output
arguments, you must separate the arguments with a comma (,).
ms as follows:


    >RENAME
    File to rename:  OLDFILE
    Rename OLDFILE to:    NEWFILE

The single line format for t
Switches modify the action of the command and therefore must  follow
the  command specification.  An exception is the Help sw   	
the I/O board. }


{
{ These are some other useful constants.
{ }

const

    MinDataBytes = 46;          { Smallest nu----------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exception is raised if a byte count passed to this 
{   interface mber of data bytes in a packet. }
    MaxDataBytes = 1500;        { Largest number of data bytes in a packet. }
    NumDCBs = is not in the valid range.  The number of data bytes
{   in an Ethernet packet must be in the range 46 <-> 1500,
{   (MinDataB16;               { The number of DCBs, commands, possible at }
                                { a single time }


{
{ Theytes <-> MaxDataBytes).
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------}


exception E10DByteError;
{-se are the procedures exported by this module.
{ }

procedure E10Init;
procedure E10IO(Cmd: EtherCommand;  Header: pEtherHea-------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exception is raised if the number of Bitder;  Buff: pEtherBuff;
                  Stat: pEtherStatus;  Bytes: Integer);
procedure E10Wait(Stat: pEtherStatus); 
proces passed to
{   E10DataBytes does not form a valid packet.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------dure E10Reset(MyAdr: EtherAddress);
function  E10DataBytes(RecvBits: Integer): Integer;
function  E10GetAdr: EtherAddress;
pr}


exception E10BadCommand;
{---------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exceocedure E10State(var NumSend, NumReceive: Integer);
procedure E10WIO(Cmd: EtherCommand;  Header: pEtherHeader;  
             ption is raised if a bad command is given to any
{   of the routines in this package.
{
{------------------------------------     Buff: pEtherBuff;  Stat: pEtherStatus;  Bytes: Integer);





{
{ These are the exceptions that may be raised by thi---------------------------} 

exception E10TooMany;
{----------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ s module.
{ }


exception E10NInited;
{---------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{  Abstract:
{   This exception is raised if more than NumDCBs commands are
{   executed at any time.
{
{---------------------- This exception will be raised if any procedures in this package
{   are called before E10Init.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------------} 

exception E10STooMany;
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------} 


exception E10NReset;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exception is raised if more the client tries to execute more
{   than one send.
{
{-----st

    TRCCAdrMid = 31744;         { 7C hex in the high order 8 bits. }
    TRCCAdrHigh = 540;          { 02 1C hex. }
    ----
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exception will be raised if any transfer commands are executed
{   before a E10Reset is done.
{EBoardOption = 0;           { The interface is on an I/O Option board. }
    EBoardIO = 1;               { The interface is on 
{---------------------------------------------------------------}


exception E10ByteCount;
{-----------------------------  	
the utility displays specific help and then exits.

Carriage return is the line terminator for all commands.

Rather  than tere on a
line in a user command file, but remember that  the  system  ignores
all characters after the exclamation mark.
?
yping a command line to initiate and direct a utility,
you can use a user command file.  A user command file is a text file
co? - Show command names



The  question mark command lists all the commands implemented in the
Shell.  Additionally, the containing  a  series  of  commands  interpretable  by  the  various
utilities.

A user command file is  a  sequential  file  cmmand provides some information on  what
each command does and how it is called.
FileUtilities>Append
Append


Append copontaining  a  list  of
utility specific commands.  Rather than typing commonly used command
sequences, you can type the sequenies one or more files to the end of an existing file.  The
command accepts a list of input files, separated by commas, and putsce once and store it  in  a  file.
The  user  command file is specified in place of the command line(s)
normally submitted to 
each file on the end of the first.  For example, the command line:

     APPEND file1,file2

puts  file2  on  to  the  endthe utility.

To inititate user command files, replace  the  command  line  for  a
utility  with  a  file  specifier,  preced  of  file1.   The  append operation is
successive.  For example, the command line:

     APPEND file1,file2,file3

first ped by an at sign (@).  The
utility requesting input then accesses the specified file and starts
to  read  and  respond  to  thuts file2 on to the end of file1 and then puts  file3  on  to
the end of file1.
Bye
Bye - Stop using Perq



Bye logs yoe  commands  contained within it.  For
example, to initiate a file of FLOPPY commands, type  the  following
in response to theu off the PERQ.  Type:

         BYE

and  it  types  your name, the date, and time of logoff.  Login then
loads and you orIf a command accepts multiple  input  or
output arguments, no switch applies to one and not another argument.
Some switches ar FLOPPY prompt:

     FLOPPY>@FLOPPY.CMD

The  FLOPPY utility accesses the file and then executes the commands
contained wie mutually exclusive (for example, /ASK and /NOASK).
If  you  specify a switch that conflicts with a previously specified
switthin the file FLOPPY.CMD.  The  default  file  type  for
user  command files is .CMD.  Thus the above command line could also
ch, the last occurence has precedence.  Likewise, if you  change
parameters  by  specifying  a  switch  multiple times, only thbe typed as follows:

     FLOPPY>@FLOPPY

You can nest user command files by simply  specifying  @file  within
the  user  e last
occurence has an effect.

All of the commands and utilities described in  this  manual  accept
the  /HELP  switch  (ecommand file.  Also, the last line of a user command file
can invoke another command file and recursive use is permitted.

Toither  type  /HELP  or  press the HELP key) to
provide general information.  Note that /HELP  overrides  all  other
switches;  comment a user command file,  start  the  comment  line  with  an
exclamation mark (!).  The exclamation mark can appear anywh   	

{   This procedure is used to initialize the Ethernet module.
{   It must be called before any other procedure in this packaget:
{   This procedure is used to start an Ethernet I/O operation and return.
{
{ Parameters:
{   Cmd is the command that is -----------------------------------------------------------}

exception E10ReceiveDone(Stat: pEtherStatus);
{---------------- are used.
{
{ Side Effects:
{   This procedure will allocate any memory used by this module.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This exception is raised when a receive command has fini------------------------------------------------}
  var SegSize, I: Integer;

    begin
    { if Init = InitVal then exit(E1shed.  It
{   is raised by the Pascal level interrupt routine for the net.
{
{ Parameters:
{   Stat will be set to the statu0Init); }
    
    SetDDS(961);
    
    {$ifc UseStartIO then}
        {$message StartIO Version not implemented.}
    {$s pointer of the command that finished.
{
{-------------------------------------------------------------------} 
       

elsec} 
        LoadExpr(Lor(Shift(EInitLoc,8),Shift(EInitLoc,-8)));
        InLineByte( #277 {JCS} );
     {$endc}
    
  
{********************} Private {********************} 

imports Memory from Memory;  
imports IO_Unit from IO_Unit;

var
  SetDDS(962); 
           
    SegSize := ((NumDCBs * WordSize(EtherDCB)) + WordSize(EtherStatus)
                + WordSize    HeadPtr: pEtherHeader;
    StatPtr: pEtherStatus;
    ClkDCBPtr: puSClkDCB;
    SavePtr: pEtherRegSave;
    EtherSeg: In(EtherHeader) + WordSize(Double)
                + WordSize(uSClkDCB) + 256) div 256;
    CreateSeg(EtherSeg, SegSize, 1, SegSteger;
    Init: Integer;
    IsReset: Boolean;
    ThisMachine: EtherAddress;

 
const
      EtherLoc = #7000;     { Theize);    
    SetDDS(963);
    for I := 1 to NumDCBs do new(EtherSeg, 4, DCBStack[I]);
    new(EtherSeg, 8, HeadPtr);
    ne location of the start of the code. }
      EInitLoc = #7010;     { Location of real initialization code. }
      ClkLoc = #70w(EtherSeg, 2, StatPtr);
    new(EtherSeg, 2, SavePtr);
    new(EtherSeg, 2, ClkDCBPtr);    
    SetDDS(964);
    SetMobilit20;       { Location of the clock code. } 

type 
    pDouble = ^Double;

var 
    DoublePtr: pDouble;

const InitVal = y(EtherSeg, UnMovable);    
    SetDDS(965);

    SendsPosted := 0;
    RecvsPosted := 0;
    StackPointer := NumDCBs;
    #125252;   { 1010101010101010.   Special initalized value. }

const UseStartIO = false;
      
{$ifc UseStartIO then} 
    RListHead := nil;
    RListTail := nil;
    SListHead := nil;
    
    IsReset := false;
    Init := InitVal;    
    Set {$Message StartIO version}
{$elsec}
    {$Message JCS version}
{$endc}
                
imports EtherInterrupt from EtherIDDS(966); 
    end;

    

procedure E10IO(Cmd: EtherCommand;  Header: pEtherHeader;  Buff: pEtherBuff;
                 nterrupt;


procedure E10Init;
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract: Stat: pEtherStatus;  Bytes: Integer);
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstrac  	
ome special microcode which  should
be  available on your machine.  If not, Bye will log off and request
that you power down t This
                doesn't log off or disconnect the remote host.

This  menu  will appear at the very top of your screen he machine by hand.   In  this  case,  ^^C  will
cause Login to run.

The command

         BYE WAIT

logs you off the mato prompt you
after you've typed ^^R.

While in Chatter, if you find that the characters you type  are  not
being echoed prochine and sends the hard disk heads to the center
of the disk (the highest disk address).  Bye then prints  a  message
and  waperly, one of two things may be wrong: the baud rate
may be inappropriate or your RS232  cable  might  not  be  connected
propits  for power down or ^^C.  When shipping a PERQ, always type
BYE WAIT to position the disk heads at the center of the disk.
erly.

Chatter  cannot  be used as a half duplex terminal since it does not
echo characters locally.
Program>Compile
Compi
The command

         BYE HELP

describes the options available for Bye.  You can specify all of the
options (OFF, WAIT, le - Invoke the PASCAL compiler


The PERQ Pascal compiler translates your Pascal source program  into
a  .Seg  file that caand HELP) as switches.

It  is  very important to log off using BYE before powering down the
machine.  If you do not, certainn be linked and run.  There are several ways to
invoke the compiler and several options that you can  use  with  it.
The comma temporary disk files  will  not  be
deleted and they will stay around using disk space until you run the
Scavenger (see belownd line takes the form:

     COMPILE [inputfile] [~] [outputfile] [/switch(es)]

Examples of legitimate compiler calls incl).
Devices>Chatter
Chatter - Talk over RS232 line


Chatter allows a PERQ to act as a terminal, using an RS232 line  for
ude:

               COMPILE Program.pas

               COM ProgramX
                   (Note that the .pas extension is icommunication.  It is invoked by typing:

              CHATTER

While  in  Chatter,  some special functions can be invoked mplicit;
                    if ProgramX does not exist, the compiler
                    looks for ProgramX.PAS.)

        by typing
^^R, the function's code letter, and CR.  These include

              S to save everything that comes from the
         COMP Program2~Program1
                   (creates the output file Program1.SEG)

               COM
                              remote computer in a file.

              T to transmit a file across RS232, as if it were being
                 (compiles the default file)

               COM /symbol=32
                   (compiles the default file with 32 symbol
  some other authorized user can log back on.

The command

         BYE OFF

logs you off and turns off your machine.  OFF  typed at the keyboard.

              C to close a file after doing a Save.

              B to change the RS232 baud rate  may  be  disabled  on
your PERQ; if so, call Three Rivers Computer Corporation for details
on reenabling it.  OFF requires s.  The default when
                Chatter comes up is 4800 baud.

              Q to quit Chatter and return to the Shell.    	
> EPromiscuousReceive) then raise E10BadCommand;

    if (SendsPosted + RecvsPosted) = NumDCBs then raise E10TooMany;

    i            end
        else
            begin
            RListTail^.NextDCB := DCBPtr;
            RListTail := DCBPtr;
 f (Cmd = ESend) and (SListHead <> nil) then raise E10STooMany;

{
{ Set up the common parts of the DCBs.
{ After that is don           end;
        end;
    end;


procedure E10Wait(Stat: pEtherStatus);
{-----------------------------------------e go into the command specific code.
{ If we are doing a receive build the linked list of DCBs.
{ We only have to start the mi------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This procedure will wait for the completion of some Ethernet request.
{
{ crocode if there are no receives
{ pending.
{ }
    
    DCBPtr := PopDCB;
    DCBPtr^.HeadPtr := Header;
    DCBPtr^.BuffParameters:
{   Stat is the pointer to the EtherStatus that was provided when the
{   command was initiated.
{
{ Exceptions:to be executed.
{
{   Header is a pointer to an Ethernet header block.  The client must fill
{   in all fields of this headerPtr := Buff;
    DCBPtr^.StatPtr := Stat;
    Stat^.CmdInProgress := true;
    DCBPtr^.Cmd := Cmd;
    DCBPtr^.NextDCB := ni.
{
{   Buff is a pointer to the buffer that is to be sent or filled.
{
{   Stat is a pointer to a status block for use duril;

    if (Cmd = ESend) then
        begin
        DCBPtr^.BitCnt := (Bytes + 16) * 8;
        SendsPosted := SendsPosted ng this command.
{
{   Bytes is the number of data bytes that are to be transferred.
{   This value must be between 46 and 15+ 1;
        Stat^.RetryTime := 0;
        SListHead := DCBPtr; 
        DevTab^[Ether10].CtlPtr := recast(DCBPtr, IOBufPtr);00
{
{ Exceptions:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called before EtherInit.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this pr
        {$ifc UseStartIO then}
            {$message StartIO not implemented.}
        {$elsec}
            LoadExpr(Lor(Shocedure is called before EReset.
{
{   E10ByteCount: Raised if Bytes is not in the valid range.
{
{   E10BadCommand: This isift(EtherLoc,8),Shift(EtherLoc,-8)));
            InLineByte( #277 {JCS} );
        {$endc}  
        end
    else
         raised if the command passed is not
{   Send, Receive or PromisciousReceive.
{
{   E10TooMany: is raised if too many commandbegin
        DCBPtr^.BitCnt := 0;
        RecvsPosted := RecvsPosted + 1;
        if RListHead = nil then
            begins are executed at a given
{   time.
{
{   E10STooMany: is raised if more than one send command is executed.
{
{------------
            DevTab^[Ether10].CtlPtr := recast(DCBPtr, IOBufPtr);
            RListHead := DCBPtr;
            RListTail := R------------------------------------------------------------} 
  var DCBPtr: pEtherDCB;

    begin
    if Init <> InitVal thListHead;
            {$ifc UseStartIO then}
                {$message StartIO not implemented.}
            {$elsec}
      en raise E10nInited;
    if not IsReset then raise E10NReset;

    if (Cmd <> ESend) and (Cmd <> EReceive) and
       (Cmd <          LoadExpr(Lor(Shift(EtherLoc,8),Shift(EtherLoc,-8)));
                InLineByte( #277 {JCS} );
            {$endc}
  	
 input file "FOOZAP.ABCD" would be copied into a new  file  named
"anotherdir>ZAPbaz.rmnDz".

If  wild  cards  are  used,  Cot is hard  to  specify,  the  Copy  program
requires  confirmation before creating a file with wild cards in the
name.

Copy                   table blocks)

If  you  want to compile a program immediately after editing it, you
need not specify its npy asks for verification of each file
copied.  This can be disabled with the switch  "/NOASK"  or  enabled
with  "/ASK".   Theame since the Shell remembers  the  last  file
edited, compiled, linked, or run.


Certain  switches  may  be included in th  latter  is  the  default.   Copy  also requests
confirmation before overwriting an existing file.  You can  override
this  ae source program text.  See
the PERQ Pascal Extensions Manual for more detailed  information  on
switches and other compiler fction  with the /NOCONFIRM switch.  (Note that the /NOCONFIRM
switch implies the /NOASK switch.)

Wild cards are not allowed eatures.
FileUtilities>Copy
Copy - Copy a file to another name



Copy  creates  a  new  file  identical to the specifiedin the directory part of the source file.
However,  Copy uses the search list to try to find the source.  Note
that this is di source.  Its
command syntax is:

               COPY SourceFile[~]DestinationFile

Copying works across devices and partitfferent from Rename and Delete which always  look  in
only one directory.

When  the  source  file name contains no wild cardions (see the PERQ  Introduc-
tory  User  Manual  for details on devices and partitions).  You can
also specify the non-file-ss, the destination
file name may contain, at most, one occurance of the wild card  "*".
In  this case, the non-directory part tructured devices CONSOLE: and  RS:.   If
you  copy a file to the RS232 interface, by default the interface is
driven at 9600 of the source replaces the "*"
in the destination.  For example,

             COPY sys:Boot>newOS>myprog.Pas dir3>new.*

wbaud.  To change  the  baud  rate,  run  the  SetBaud
program (see below).

The  source  file for Copy may contain wild cardsould copy the file  "sys:Boot>newOS>myprog.Pas"  into  a  new  file
named  "dir3>new.myProg.Pas".   This is most useful when yo (for a description
of the wild cards, see the PERQ Introductory User Manual).   If  the
source  contains  wild  cards, the deu want to
copy a file from one directory to another with the same name.    For
example,

             COPY dir1>prog.Pas *
stination must contain the same
wild cards in the same order.  In this case, Copy matches all  files
in  the directory with th
copies  prog.pas from the directory "dir1" into the current directo-
ry.

If there are no wild cards in the source, an attee source pattern.  For each match, the part
of the source file name that matches each  wild  card  replaces  the
correspondingmpt to  include  in
the  destination name other wild card characters, besides the single
"*" discussed above, may lead to prob  wild card in the destination.  As an example, for the
command:

              COPY foo*.abc#   anotherdir>*baz.rmn#z

thelems later.  These  extra  wild
cards  will be treated as simple literal characters.  Because a file
name with wild cards in i   	
be received by the network
{   interface.  If there are no Receives pending then the packet
{   will be dumped.
{
{ Exceptioameters:
{   RecvBits is the number of bits that were in the packet.  This
{   value will come from the BitsRecv field of the ns:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called before EtherInit. 
{
{------------------------------------------------status block.
{
{ Results:
{   This function will return the number of data bytes that were in
{   the packet.
{
{ Excepti-----------------------}
  var DCBPtr: pEtherDCB;

    begin
    if Init <> InitVal then raise E10NInited;

    HeadPtr^.Sons:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called before EtherInit.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this procedure is callerc := MyAdr;

{
{ Clear all current DCBs.
{ }

    while RListHead <> nil do
        begin
        PushDCB(RListHead);
d before EReset.
{
{   E10DByteError: Raised if the numebr of bits in the packet was
{   not a multiple of 8 or if the number        RListHead := RListHead^.NextDCB;
        end;

    while SListHead <> nil do
        begin
        PushDCB(SlistHea of data bytes was less than
{   MinDataBytes.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------------}
d);
        SListHead := SListHead^.NextDCB;
        end;

{
{ Set up the DCB.
{ }

    DCBPtr := PopDCB;

    DCBPtr^  Var Tmp1: Integer;
    begin
    if Init <> InitVal then raise E10nInited;
    if not IsReset then raise E10NReset;
 
   .Headptr := HeadPtr;
    DCBPtr^.BuffPtr := recast(SavePtr, pEtherBuffer);
    DCBPtr^.StatPtr := StatPtr;
    DCBPtr^.Cmd := Tmp1 := RecvBits div 8;
    if (Tmp1 * 8) <> RecvBits then raise E10DByteError;

    Tmp1 := Tmp1 - 20;
    if (Tmp1 < MinD
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called before E10Init.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this procedure is called befo EReset;
    DCBPtr^.BitCnt := 0;
    DCBPtr^.NextDCB := nil; 
    DevTab^[Ether10].CtlPtr := recast(DCBPtr, IOBufPtr);

{re EReset.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------} 
    begin
    if Init <> InitVal the
{ Do the reset.
{ }

    {$ifc UseStartIO then }
        {$message StartIO not implemented}
    {$elsec}
        LoadExprn raise E10nInited;
    if not IsReset then raise E10NReset;
    while Stat^.CmdInProg do ;
    end;  


procedure E10Res(Lor(Shift(EtherLoc,8),Shift(EtherLoc,-8)));
        InLineByte( #277 {JCS} );
    {$endc}

    PushDCB(DCBPtr);
    SendsPet(MyAdr: EtherAddress);
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This posted := 0;
    RecvsPosted := 0;    
    ThisMachine := MyAdr;
    IsReset := true;
    end;




function E10DataByterocedure is used to reset the Ethernet interface.
{
{ Parameters:
{   MyAdr is an Ethernet address block that contains the ads(RecvBits: Integer): Integer;
{------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   Tdress of this 
{   this interface.  Once this address is set any packets that have a
{   Source field that matches MyAdr will his procedure is used to obtain the number of data bytes that are
{   in a packet that was received over the network.
{
{ Par  	
r.   When  the
user  types  ^^SHIFT-D or an uncaught exception is discovered, a dump
of the user stack is shown.  This has themodule.  If the Seg file
found is not the one that was loaded, the procedure  names  will  be
wrong.   The procedure numbers w form:

Control-shift-D dump
Debug at     108 in routine 7 in IO_PRIVA.
Called from  214 in routine RANDOMWI (8) in WIPEWIN.ill always be correct, however.  For
the procedure names of  system  modules,  the  system  run  file  is
checked to find the 
Called from  395 in routine WIPEWIN (0) in WIPEWIN.
Called from  149 in routine 0 in LOADER.
Called from  222 in routine 1 iSeg file name.  This Seg file is used to get the
procedure names.  If the system run file or the system Seg files are
not accen SYSTEM.
Called from  520 in routine 0 in SYSTEM.

First, the reason for taking the dump is shown.  Next is a trace  of
allssible, the debugger will not be able to print the procedure
names for system routines.

After the dump is printed, you will  is a useful command if you'd like to edit your own  copy  of  a
file  without  changing  the original one.  (The Editor provid  the  procedures  on the stack.  Each line shows the location in
the code, the routine that location is  in,  and  the  modulees you
with the ability to do  this  too,  but  copying  can  give  you  an
additional safeguard against unintentional changes  which
contains  that  routine.   The location is the QCode offset from the
beginning of the procedure.  You can use QDis to  to the source.)

The  names  of  SourceFile  and  DestinationFile  may  be identical;
however if they are identical a new fi try  to  associate
this  with the corresponding place in the source.  When the debugger
can find the procedure name, it is prle will not  be  created.   If
you want two files you should use nonidentical names.

If  the  file  you  are  copying  to  ainted followed by the procedure
number.   At  other  times, only the routine number will be printed.
You can count the procedulready  exists, Copy requests
confirmation before overwriting it.  This can be disabled  by  using
the  switch  "/NOCONFIRM"  re (and exception and function) headers  in
the module source file to determine which procedure it is.

When  counting  proceor  enabled  using the switch "/CONFIRM".
NOCONFIRM also sets NOASK.  If an error is discovered and wild cards
were  used,  Codures, start with one for programs and zero for
modules.  The  main  body  of  a  program  is  its  procedure  zero.
Exported py  asks  the user whether to continue processing the
rest of the files  that  match  the  input.   This  confirmation  is
req and  forward  procedures  are counted only once, where the
name  first  appears.   Internal  (nested)  procedures  are  counteuired no matter what switches were specified.

A  final  switch is "/HELP" which describes the function of Copy and
the variod
exactly like other procedures.


A  note  about procedure names:
                                 These names are always us switches.
Program>Debugger
Debugger - The preliminary debugger


The current operating system includes a simple debuggetruncated to
eight characters and converted to all uppercase.  To get the  names,
the  debugger examines the Seg file for the    	
.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this procedure is called before EReset.
{
{---------------------------------------------------be sent or filled.
{
{   Stat is a pointer to a status block for use during this command.
{
{   Bytes is the number of data --------------------}
    begin
    if Init <> InitVal then raise E10nInited;
    if not IsReset then raise E10NReset;

   bytes that are to be transfered.
{   This value must be between 46 and 1500
{
{ Exceptions:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this p E10GetAdr := ThisMachine;
    end;


procedure E10State(var NumSend, NumReceive: integer);
{-----------------------------rocedure is called before E10Init.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this procedure is called before EReset.
{
{   E10ByteCount: R-------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This procedure is used to return the internal state of the
{  aised if Bytes is not in the valid range.
{
{   E10BadCommand: This is raised if the command passed is not

{   Send, Receiv Ethernet interface.
{
{ Parameters:
{   NumSend will be set to the number of Sends that are pending.
{
{   NumReceive wille or PromisciousReceive.
{
{   E10TooMany: is raised if too many commands are executed at a given
{   time.
{
{   E10STooMa be set to the number of receives that are pending.
{
{ Exceptions:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called beforeny: is raised if more than one send command is executed.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------ E10Init.
{ 
{   E10NReset: Raised if this procedure is called before EReset.
{
{-------------------------------------------------}
    begin
    E10IO(Cmd, Header, Buff, Stat, Bytes);
    E10Wait(Stat);
    end.


                              ----------------------------}
    begin
    if Init <> InitVal then raise E10nInited;
    if not IsReset then raise E10NReset ;

    NumSend := SendsPosted;
    NumReceive := RecvsPosted;
    end;



procedure E10WIO(Cmd: EtherCommand;  Header:  pEtherHeader;  
                  Buff: pEtherBuff;  Stat: pEtherStatus;  Bytes: Integer);
{---------------------------------- ataBytes) or (Tmp1 > MaxDataBytes) then
        raise E10DByteError;

    E10DataBytes := Tmp1;
    end;


function  E10---------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This procedure is used to start an Ethernet I/O operation and wait GetAdr: EtherAddress;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{   This functifor it
{   to complete.
{
{ Parameters:
{   Cmd is the command that is to be executed.
{
{   Header is a pointer to an Ethon will return the address of this machine.
{
{ Exceptions:
{   E10NInited: Raised if this procedure is called before E10Initernet header block.  The client must fill
{   in all fields of this header.
{
{   Buff is a pointer to the buffer that is to   	
 does not know the types or sizes of variables,  but  it
does  know  the  number of words allocated for locals, arguments and
s the second one, etc.   This
does not hold for procedure parameters, however, where the variables
are always stored in exactlresults.  Note that the compiler may  generate  temporary  variables
which are included in the local count.

When  a  debuggey the order declared.

The debugger's commands are:

   ?  Print a list of all the commands.

   x  Set the radix.  All inr  command is invoked which takes an offset, you can
type a number which is the offset of the word to print.  Zero is the
firstegers are normally  printed  in  signed
      decimal.   With this command, you can specify any radix from 2
      to 36.  Ift  word.   If  you type -1, all the words in the current context
will be printed.  For example, to an "a" command, all the  arg the radix is  negative  then  all  output  will  be
      unsigned.  If it is positive then output will be signed.  Note
    uments
will  be  printed for -1.  If you type -2, the debugger will request
the first and the last offsets to print.  In this   that this radix is only for output;  all  input  is  still  in
      signed decimal.

   >  Up  level.   Move up one level manner, a range of
values  can  be  printed.  No checking is done to make sure that the
offsets typed are in range; if a numbein the stack towards the top of
      the stack.  To investigate the variables of a procedure,  move
      up  or down the star is out of range, some random
data will be printed.  Data is printed in the form:

     [ 7] ( 5053^^) = 6

where  7  is tck until that procedure is reached and then
      it can be investigated.

   <  Down level.  Move down one level towards  thbe asked if you want  to  debug.
(If  a  dump  is  printed  due  to  a ^^SHIFT-C, no debugging will be
allowed).  If you answehe offset in the current procedure, 5053 is the offset
from the bottom of the entire stack and  6  is  the  value  in  that
lor no, the program will be continued if it was
called  from ^^SHIFT-D, otherwise it will be aborted and control will
go back tocation.

A  note  on  counting  variables:   
                                    Imagine  that your procedure was
defined w the Shell.  If you decide to  debug,  the  debugger  will
print something like:

Scrounge, V0.10

  Now at routine KEYINTRith the following variables:
    var a,b,c: Integer;
        d: Char;
When a list of variables are defined in the same statem (7) in IO_PRIVA
  There are 5 local words, 0 argument words, and 0 result words

Debug>

Now you can use the debugger's coent, they are
allocated  in  reverse  order so the first word is the variable "c".
The second word  is "b", the third "a" and mmands to investigate your program.
Notice that the debugger goes to more effort to find  the  procedure
names  than  the  orithe fourth is "d".   This
is  true  for local and global variables and for records.  Note that
if you had declared the variablginal dump, so that if a procedure name was not
printed at first, going into the debugger may get it displayed.

The debuggeres as:
    var a: Integer;
        b: Integer;
        c: Integer;
        d: Char;
then "a" would be the first word, "b" i   	
{ Exception Definitions.
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Except.Dfs ndex out of range }
      ErrStrLong       =  9;   { string to be assigned is too long }
      ErrInxCase       = 10;   { arra- Exception number definitions.
{       J. P. Strait    10 Dec 80.
{       Copyright (c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 19y index or case expression out of range }
      ErrSTLATE        = 11;   { parameter in STLATE instruction is too large }
    80.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This file defines exception numbers used by the Perq Q-code
{       interpreter microcode, the deb  ErrUndfQcd       = 12;   { execution of an undefined Q-code }
      ErrUndfInt       = 13;   { undefined device interrupt detugger, the exception handler, and
{       the post-mortem dumper.  These must agree with the corresponding
{       routine numected }
      ErrIOSFlt        = 14;   { segment fault detected during I/O }
      ErrMParity       = 15;   { memory parity erbers in Except.Pas.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------ror }
      ErrEStk          = 16;   { E-stack not empty at INCDDS }
      ErrOvflLI        = 17;   { overflow during convert ----------------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ 28 Dec 81  1.4 Michael R. Kristofic
{ Add ErrRefrom long to integer }
      ErrOvrReal       = 18;   { floating point overflow }
      ErrUnderReal     = 19;   { floating poalDivZero and ErrRtoIOvfl.
{
{ 20 Dec 81  1.3 Michael R. Kristofic
{ Add ErrOvrReal and ErrUnderReal.
{
{ 18 May 81  1.2  Jint underflow }
      ErrRealDivZero   = 20;   { floating point division by zero }
      ErrRtoIOvfl      = 21;   { floating pohn Strait
{ Add ErrOvflLI.
{ }

{ 14 Mar 81  1.1  John Strait
{ Add ErrEStk.
{ }

{ 10 Dec 80  1.0  John Strait
{ Staroint to integer overflow }

      ErrLast          = 21;   { last exception number }
                                        t file.
{ }
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

      RNRaise          =  0;    { routine number of Raise }
      RNInitException  =  1;   { routine number of InitException }

      ErrFirst         =  2;    { first exception number }

      ErrAbort         =  2;   { user abort }
      ErrDump          =  3;   { user dump }
       ErrSegmentFault  =  4;   { segment fault }
      ErrStackOverflow =  5;   { stack overflow }
      ErrDivZero       =  6; module Except;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Except - Perq Pascal Except  { division by zero }
      ErrMulOvfl       =  7;   { overflow in multiplication }
      ErrStrIndx       =  8;   { string iion Routines.
{ J. P. Strait   10 Dec 80.
{ Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.
{ 
{ Abstract:
{       M  	
 Top of Stack.  Move to the top of the stack.

   b Bottom of Stack.  Move to the bottom of the stack.

   c Current.   Showthe current mode and asks for  a  new  one.
      If  you  type  "?"  at  this  point,  a list of the options is
      printeds  number  of  words  for arguments, returns and
      locals for the current procedure.

   d Display Stack.  This command r.  They are: i=integer,  s=string,  c=char,  B=Boolean,
      b=byte.   Notice  the case sensitivity of the arguments.  When
 eprints the original dump.   Some
      additional  procedure  names may be printed.  In addition, the
      procedure where y     the mode is string, the debugger cannot print a range  or  all
      data  since  it  cannot  know how much memory was allou are debugging is marked with "<**>".

   l  Local.  Examine the local data.   The  debugger  reprints  the
      number  oocated to
      hold the first string.  In this case, if the  -1  argument  is
      given,  the  offset  is  assumed  to  be f  local  words.  You can type the offset of the word
      you want to see.

   a  Argument.  Examine the arguments to a pro zero.  When printing
      strings, the length is printed first.   When  printing  bytes,
      the  radix specified still hocedure or function.

   e  Exception.  Examine the arguments (parameters)  to  an  excep-
      tion.

   r Returns.  Examilds (although they will always be
      unsigned).  For bytes and characters,  offsets  are  still  in
      terms  of  words;ne the return values from a procedure.

   g Globals.   Examine  the  globals for the module or program that
      the proced  the  debugger prints both bytes in the word
      specified.

   s Stack.  This command permits display of words anywhere  ure is in.  When the g command is given, the  module
      or  program name is printed.  If it is a program, the debugger
    on  the
      program  stack.   Detailed  knowledge of the compiler's memory
      allocation is necessary to  utilize  this    asks if you want to skip input and output.  These are the  two
      file  variables that are defined for every program and tcommand  so  it  is
      generally not useful.

   q Quit.   Exits  the  debugger  and  aborts  the program that was
      ake up
      space at the top.  If you answer yes to this question, you  do
      not  have  to  worry  about  the  space for running.  This returns control back to the Shell.  It requires
      confirmation.

   p Proceed.  Exits the debugger and rese  bottom  of  the
      stack.   When  entering the debugger, the current procedure is
      set at the top so this command hthem when counting
      variables.  Unfortunately, there is no way to examine data  in
      modules that do not have proceduas to be used first.

   ^^  Dereference.  Dereference any pointer in memory.  This takes a
      segment  number  and  an  ores on the stack.

   m Mode.   The  debugger  cannot know the type of data, but if you
      know, you can tell the debuggerffset.  For a variable parameter or
      pointer variable, the offset is first  and  then  the  segment
      number.

   t.  The mode  command  lets  you
      specify  the  output  mode  for  data.  When you type the Mode
      command, it prints    	
t change when new exceptions are defined.  This
{       means that new exceptions may be defined without requiring that the
{ dure RaiseP( ES, ER, PStart, PEnd: Integer );
procedure InitExceptions;

exception Abort( Message: String );
exception Dump(      operating system be re-linked.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-- Message: String );
exception XSegmentFault( S1,S2,S3,S4: Integer );  { segment fault }
exception XStackOverflow;             ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ 28 Dec 81  V2.9  Michael R. Kri            { stack overflow }
exception DivZero;   { division by zero }
exception MulOvfl;   { overflow in multiplication }
odule Except provides the following things:
{
{       1) Definitions of the microcode generated exceptions.
{
{       2) A pstofic
{ Define RealDiv0 and Real2Int
{
{ 23 Dec 81  V2.8  Brad Myers
{ Fixed handler reraise bug
{
{ 20 Dec 81  V2.7  Microcedure to tell the microcode which segment number these
{          exceptions are defined in.
{
{       3) The default handhael R. Kristofic
{ Define  OverReal and UndeReal
{
{  3 Dec 81  V2.6  Brad Myers.
{ Export ExcSeg.
{ Make Handle All not hler of all exceptions.  The compiler enables
{          this handler in every main program.
{
{       4) A Pascal routine to andle Stack Overflow or SegFault.
{ }

{ 28 May 81  V2.5  Brad Myers.
{ Change name of STLate exception (so no conflict withsearch the stack in when an exception is
{          raised.
{
{ Design:
{       The file Except.Dfs is included into Perq.Mi Qcodes.dfs
{ }

{ 28 May 81  V2.4  John Strait.
{ Take out special test for InPmd (exception raised while in Scrounge).
{ cro as well
{       as into this module.  It defines routine numbers for the exceptions
{       generated by the microcode.  NThis will be replaced by a handler of All exceptions in Scrounge.
{ }

{ 23 May 81  V2.3  John Strait.
{ Allow StackOverflowote that there must be agreement
{       between these constants and the routine numbers of the exception
{       definitions. while in Scrounge (just like SegmentFault).
{ }

{ 18 May 81  V2.2  John Strait.
{ New exception for Long Integer overflow.  No program checks these--if you add or remove
{       exception definitions you must be sure to update Except.Dfs
{       in
{ }

{ 12 May 81  V2.1  Brad A. Myers.
{ New IO imports.
{ }

{  5 May 81  V2.0  Brad A. Myers.
{ Added preliminary deb the appropriate way.
{
{       The routine number of RaiseP is also defined in Except.Dfs
{       as 0.  Since the microcodeugger.
{ }

{ 23 Mar 81  V1.2  J. P. Strait.
{ Add support for virtual memory.
{ }

{ 14 Mar 81  V1.1  J. P. Strait.
{ A must know this, it is strongly
{       suggested that it not be modified.
{
{       The routine number of InitExceptions is dd PMD and try to get it working.
{ }

{ 10 Dec 80  V1.0  J. P. Strait.
{ Start module as part of a proposal.
{ }
{-------not needed by the compiler
{       or Perq.Micro, but it has been assigned routine number 1 so that
{       its number will no----------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports


const ExceptVersion = '2.9';


proce  	
umes the program executing.
      Note that this command allows  you  to  resume  from  uncaught
      exceptions  but  this  ocumentation.

Delete also allows you to select the files you  want  to  delete  by
using  a  PopUp  menu  (see the section ois  not  recommended.   In  this  case,
      confirmation is required.  If the debugger was entered through
      ^^SHIFT-D, n "PopUp Menus" in the PERQ
Introductory Users Manual).   To  get  a  PopUp  menu,  type  Delete
followed  by  a  carriage retthen no confirmation is required.

If  an  exception is raised inside the debugger, the debugger aborts
immediately and exitsurn (no arguments).  Delete will prompt
with

      File to delete or press for Menu:

at this point you can simply press t  to  the  Shell.   In  the  debugger,  ^^C  and
^^SHIFT-C  both  cause immediate exit to the Shell also.  ^^SHIFT-D is
disablhe pen or puck for a menu.   You
can  also  type  a file name followed by switches.  For example, you
might type

          ed while inside the debugger.  Also, the  HELP  key  does  not
work  while  in  the  debugger;  use  the debugger question mark   :boot>myDir>*.TMP/confirm

and then press down on the pen or  puck.   You  should  not  type  a
carriage return before pre (?)
command.
FileUtilities>Delete
Delete - Remove a file


The command:

               DELETE FileSpecification[,filessing.

The  menu displayed when you press contains the files that match the
file pattern.  If no pattern is typed, all the f2,...filen][/switch]

irrevocably destroys the specified file(s).  It deletes  the  file's
name  from  the  directory  and pliles in the  current
directory  are  listed.   Simply  select  in the menu the files that
should be deleted.  Unlike the menu aces the blocks it occupied on the
free list, thus making those  blocks  available  for  use  by  other
files.

Wildcards  mfor the Shell, the  Delete  menu
allows  you to select multiple files.  All selected files are marked
by reverse-video.  Theseay  be  used  in  the  file  specification, but not in a
directory part.  See the section entitled "Specifying a  file  name"
 are the files that will  be  deleted.   You
can de-select a selected file by simply pressing on it again.  Since
the number oin  the  PERQ Introductory User Manual  for details on PERQ wildcard
conventions.

The valid switches for Delete are:

    f files that can be displayed is limited,  scrolling  is
provided  when  the the number of files matching the file specifica-
  /CONFIRM
                asks for verification before deleting
                a file.  It's the default when you use
     tion is large.  Use of the scrolling feature  is  described  in  the
PERQ Introductory Users Manual.

Once  you  have  select           a wildcard unless you use a PopUp
                menu (see below).

      /NOCONFIRM
                is the defaed all the files you wish to delete, move the
cursor to the lower right corner of the menu to the  spot  with  the
"x"  in  itult when you specify
                only a filename without a wildcard.

      /HELP
                provides some online d.  The cursor should change to a large exclamation point.
When you press here, all the deletes will take place.  If,  however,   	
 ;
procedure ReadSpiceSegment(id : SegID; firstblk,numblks : integer; 
                           ptr : ptrDiskBuffer);
procedmodule FileAccess;
{---------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{ Module to haure WriteSpiceSegment(id : SegID; firstblk,numblks : integer;
                            ptr : ptrDiskBuffer);
procedure Indendle reading, writing, entering and deleting files independant
{ from the directory structure.
{
{ Written by the CMU Spice Gx(logblk : integer; var indblk,indoff : integer);

Exception BadLength(len: integer);
{--------------------------------------roup
---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract: Raised if try to truncate file to a length < 0
 Parameters: len is bad length-----------------------------------
  Change history.

   28 May 81  V1.7 BAM  Changes to Lights module.
   26 May 81  V1.6 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

Exception NotAFile(id: SegID);
{-------------JPS  Use new Lights module.
   19 May 81  V1.5 BAM  Fix position of scavenge light.
   12 May 81  V1.4 BAM  Prevent scavenge f--------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract: Raised when an operation is attempted and the SegID pexception StrIndx;   { string index out of range }
exception StrLong;   { string to be assigned is too long }
exception InxCasrom being recursive.
    7 Mar 81  V1.3 JPS  Use DiskSegment for memory allocation.
   30 Mar 81  V1.2 BAM  Renamed from Spicee;   { array index or case expression out of range }
exception STLATETooDeep; { parameter in STLATE instruction is too large }Seg
   27 Mar 81  V1.1 BAM  Added comments; fixed truncate
   19 Mar 81  V1.0 BAM  Changed Bit32 to FSBit32; add FBLANKSIZE to
exception UndfQcd;   { execution of an undefined Q-code }
exception UndfInt;   { undefined device interrupt detected }
except Index
   17 Mar 81  V0.2 GGR  Fixed bug in SegAddr checking for logical block
                         inconsistency.
    6 ion IOSFlt;    { segment fault detected during I/O }
exception MParity;   { memory parity error }
exception EStack;    { E-staMar 81  V0.1 JPS  Export the Index procedure.
    ? ??? ??  V0.0 CMU-Spice Group  Started
------------------------------------ck wasn't empty at INCDDS }
exception OvflLI;    { Overflow in conversion to integer from Long Integer }
exception OverReal;  ---------------------------------------}


{******************} exports {***************************}

imports Arith from { floating point overflow }
exception UndeReal;  { floating point underflow }
exception RealDiv0;  { floating point division bArith;
imports DiskIO from DiskIO;
imports AllocDisk from AllocDisk;

function  CreateSpiceSegment(partition : integer; kindy zero }
exception Real2Int;  { floating point real to integer overflow }

var ExcSeg: Integer;

private
                  : SpiceSegKind) : SegID;
procedure DestroySpiceSegment(id : SegID);
procedure TruncateSpiceSegment(id : SegID; len : integer)  	
OFILE      Profile information that
                                is cached in memory
            /SEARCH             Printsry - Show what files exist



The Directory command provides an alphabetical list of  files  in  a
directory.   You  can di the current search list.
            /SHELLNAME          Name of current Shell runfile
            /SHELLINFO          Shell splay the directory listing at your terminal
or you can specify that the Directory command write the listing to a
file.  The fspecific information
            /DISKSIZE           Size of hard disk
            /TIME               Gives current date and orm for the command line is:

           DIRECTORY [dirSpec>][fileSpec]{/switch}[~][outputfile]

If  it  is  invoked  withou
you  press outside of the menu before pressing here, no deletes will
take place and the program aborts.

When using a PopUp time
            /PATH               Gives current path, default
                                partition name and default
 menu for deletion, the default is NOVERIFY.  Thus
all selected files are deleted when you press the exclamation point.
For add                               device name
            /LASTFILE           Default file for Edit and Compile
            /BOOTed safety, you can still specify the /VERIFY switch (as shown
above)  to  cause  the system to ask for confirmation on each of CHAR           Character used for booting
            /BOOTS              Valid boot characters
            /SWAP             the
selected files before deleting it.
Details
Details - Show details of system environment

The Details command provides   Whether swapping is enabled or not
                                and to where
            /IOERRORS           A count of h some  information  about  the  current
state  of  your  PERQ.   Typing  DETAILS  /HELP  will get you online
documentation.  Tow many times each of
                                the IO errors occurred since the
                                last bohe Details command line is of the form:

            DETAILS [/switch]

Valid switches are:

            /USERNAME        ot
            /ALL                Displays all of the  above  informa-
tion
            /HELP               For online docum   Name of current user
            /USERID             ID of current user
            /MEMORYSIZE         The size of memoryentation

These  may  be  abbreviated to as many characters as are unique.  If
you don't specify a switch, a selection of the
            /PARITYERRORS       Parity error information
            /PROFILENAME        Name of profile file for the
        available information
is typed.  If you specify *, all information is typed.

"Details  /Partition"  is  very  useful since                          current user
            /PARTITION          Names of all devices and partitions
                    it tells how much free
space there is in all the partitions.

See the PERQ Introductory User Manual   and  the  PERQ  File  S            known (includes the number of free
                                blocks in each partition)
            /LOADEDPRystem
Utilities  Manual  for  details  on Partitions, Search lists, Shell,
Path, and Boots.
FileUtilities>Directory
Directo   	
en by: Brad A. Myers  3-Mar-81
{
{Copyright (C) 1981 Three Rivers Computer Corporation
--------------------------------------
                      FileSparse       : Boolean;  {true if can be sparse}
                      FileOpenHow      : FSOpenTyp--------------------------------------}

{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Verse;  {howOpen}
                      FileCreateDate   : TimeStamp;
                      FileWriteDate    : TimeStamp;
       ions: 
   V1.2 16-Mar-81  Brad A. Myers   Changed openType
   V1.1 11-Mar-81  Brad A. Myers   Added sparse and OpenHow bits to               FileAccessDate   : TimeStamp;
                      FileType         : integer;  {see FileType.pas}
            FSData
   V1.0  5-Mar-81  Brad A. Myers   Created by copying text from Arith and
                                    DiskIO
           FileRights       : integer;  {protection code}
                      FileOwner        : FSBit8;   {UserId of file ow----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

EXPORTS

Imports GetTimeStamp from GetTimeStaner}
                      FileGroup        : FSBit8;   {GroupId}
                      Filename         : PartialPathName;
 mp; {Using TimeStamp}

const
  DBLZERO            = nil;    {a two word 0}

type
  FSBit8             = 0..255;
  FSBit16                end;
    ptrFSDataEntry = ^FSDataEntry;

PRIVATE
                                                                       = integer;
  FSBit32            = ^integer; {will be a long when compiler knows about 'em}

Const DISKBUFSIZE  =  256;      {defined by hardware, 256 words per sec}

type SegID         = FSBit32;  {In SpiceSeg, the virtual address of the
                                  -1 block of a file}
     DiskAddr      = FSBit32;  {The virtual address of a DiskBlock}
       assed does not
            seem to be the id for a valid file
 Parameters: id is the bad id
---------------------------------                 
     SimpleName    = string[25];   {only the filename in the directory}
     PathName      = string[100];  {------------------------------------------}

{******************} private {***************************}
                     full name of file with partition and dev}
     PartialPathName = string[80]; {file name including all directories}
     FSOpenModule FileDefs;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{Abstract:
{
{ Defines soType    = (FSNotOpen, FSOpenRead, FSOpenWrite, FSOpenExecute);
     FSDataEntry   = packed record
                      FileBlme constants and types needed by various people so FileSystem
{  doesn't need to import DiskIO in its export section
{
{Writtocks       : integer;  {Size of file in blocks}
                      FileBits         : 0..4096;  {Number of bits in last blk}  	
 Boot partition for all the run files in
           directories whose names start with "x" and writes all
           of these irSpec even if they do not
                       contain any matches for fileSpec.


           /ONECOLUMN
               names into the file "run.list".

           DIRECTORY Program*
           tells you what files beginning with
           "Pr       tells Direct to print all files in one
                      column.  This is the default when the
                    ogram" are in the current directory, e.g.,
           Program.pas, Program.seg, Program.run.

           DIRECT *zing*
       output goes to a file.

           /MULTICOLUMN
                       tells Direct to print files in four
                     lists all files with "zing" in their names.

           DIR Program*/SIZE
           lists files beginning with "Progra        columns.  This is the default when doing
                       a FAST directory to the screen.  This
                m" and
           tells how much disk space each occupies.

The following are the switches available for use with this progra       switch does nothing if SIZE or ALL is
                       specified.


           /DELIMITER
                    m:

           /HELP
                      types online documentation.

           /FAST
                      prints a sh  when used in conjunction with an output file
                      specification, writes filenames as

                    t  a  switch,  all  files  in the current
directory will be listed.   To  write  the  output  of  a  Directory
listing to a fiort directory.  This is
                      the default.

           /SIZE
                      tells you how many blocksle, specify an output filename.

If  there  are  wild  cards, the dirSpec part is matched against all
directories and the fil and bits
                      are in each file.

           /ALL
                      provides the following information eSpec part is matched against  all  files  in
the  directories  that matched dirSpec.  Wild cards are described in
the sectionabout
                      each file:

                        Number of Blocks
                        Number of Bits
    "Specifying a file name" in the PERQ  Introductory  User
Manual.  Wild cards are not allowed in partition or device names.

                     Kind of file
                        Creation date
                        Last Update date
            Examples of usage include:

           DIR
           lists every file in the current directory

           DIR *>*
                  Last Access date

           /LISTDIRECTORIES
                       When doing a multi-directory
                   shows all files in all directories starting with the
           current directory and including all subdirectories.

            listing, only the directories that
                       have valid matches for the fileSpec
                               DIR/HELP
           gives online documentation

           DIRECTORY :BOOT>x*>*.run~run.list
           looks in theare printed.  This switch tells
                       Direct to print all directories that
                       match the d   	
ory structure for PERQ FileSystem
{ Written by:  CMU Spice Group
{------------------------------------------------------------***************************}
                                                                                                  -----------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Versions:  
     V2.6   20-Apr-81  John Strait Use DiskSegment for allocation.
     V2.5   3-Apr-81  Brad Myers  Fixed bug when creating file with nammodule FileSystem;
{--------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{
{ Spice Interime that
                                   contains ..
     V2.4  30-Mar-81  Brad Myers  Changed name from SpiceDir
           File System.

 Written by: Richard F. Rashid
 Date      : February 24, 1981
 Copyright (C) 1981 - Carnegie-Mellon Universit                         Changed length of Default strings
     V2.3  26-Mar-81  Brad Myers  Added comments
     V2.2  19-Mar-y
--------------------------------------------------------------------}

{--------------------------------------------------81  Brad Myers  PERQ_String
     V2.1  11-Mar-81  Brad Myers  Fixed Get- Put-InDir so don't read filename
                    ------------------
 Change history

  4 Jan 82  BAM   V7.3    New exception for closing a directory.
  3 Dec 81  BAM   V7.2                if not inuse
     V2.0   9-Mar-81  Brad Myers  Changed directory syntax to dev:part>dir>fn
     V1.1   1-Mar-81   New version of FlushFail.
 12 May 81  BAM   V7.1    Fixed to allow FlushFail on open.
 12 May 81  BAM   V7.0    Added Excep  Brad Myers  Changed to smaller HASHFRAMESIZE and smaller
                                    entry size
     V1.0  ??-???-??tions for FSLookUp and FSEnter.
                          Catch string too long from FixFileName
  9 Apr 81  BAM   V6.7    FSC  CMU people  Started
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{*********************lose no longer sets any dates (set by open/enter).
  3 Apr 81  BAM   V6.6    Fixed bug in entering filename with .. in it.
 27***}Exports{**********************************}

imports FileDefs from FileDefs;

function  GetFileID(name : PathName) : Seg Mar 81  BAM   V6.5    Fixed Close to do Trucate.
 26 Mar 81  BAM   V6.4    Added comments.
 19 Mar 81  BAM   V6.3    import PID;
function  PutFileID(var name : PathName; id : SegID) : boolean;
function  DeleteFileID(name : PathName) : SegID;
functionERQ_String not PERQ.String.
 17 Mar 81  BAM   V6.2    Added new procedure FSIsFSDev.
 10 Mar 81  BAM   V6.1    Changed FixFile  GetDisk(var name : PathName; var partition : integer) : boolean;

var
  DefaultPartitionName : SimpleName; {includes deviceName to create a full file spec;
                           removed self-init from FixFileName
  9 Mar 81  BAM   V6.0    changModule FileDir;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{ The direct name and ends in a ">" }
  DefaultDeviceName    : SimpleName; {ends in a colon}


{************************}Private{*******  	
t sort the directory.  In this
                      case, all the files are listed in essentially
                      rando  all the subdirectories, etc.  Lines are drawn
from each directory to its parent.   If  a  directory  is  supplied,
DirTree sm order.  This switch is useful when
                      swapping is turned off and Direct does not
                      haimply starts the search from that directory.

If  the  specified,  or default, root directory contains the current
directory,ve enough memory to sort the file (for
                      example, when running from the floppy).

                      N DirTree highlights the  current  directory  with  reverse
video.   You  can  then  change the path by moving the cursor to theAME - sort by the name of the file.  This is
                      the default.

                      SIZE - sort by file si
desired directory and pressing the pen or puck.  This is  equivalent
to  issuing  a  Path  command;  DirTree  permits  you toze.  This operation
                      lists files in decreasing order, with the
                      largest file first. change your
current directory.

Typing any character or pressing in an area that does not contain  a
directory exits DirTre

                      CREATEDATE - sort by creation date.  The most
                      recent file is listed first.

  e.

If  the  directory is too deep to fit on the screen, DirTree puts an
asterisk (*) on the right of the parent.  You can  r                    ACCESSDATE - sort by last access.  For this
                      function, access is defined as the last reinvoke  DirTree
with this directory as the root to see more of the tree structure.

DirTree accepts three switches: /WAIT, tead
                      operation performed on the file.

                      UPDATEDATE - sort by last update.  For thishe default, enables pressing
to select a new path; /NOWAIT disables pressing to select a new path
(DirTree  simply  displays t
                      switch, update is defined as the last write
                      operation performed on the file.
Fihe tree structure); and /HELP for online
documentation.
FileUtilities>Dismount
Dismount - Discontinue use of device



T        name | name

                      into a file.  This is useful
                      for creating command files.

leUtilities>DirTree
DirTree - Show directory structure as a tree


DirTree  gives  a  graphic  representation  of the filesy           /PARTITIONS
                      gives information about all partitions
                      after the files are stem's tree
structure.  It erases the screen and then displays a tree of all the
directories  starting  from  the  root  direclisted.

           /SORT=option
                      specifies the method in which the directory
                      is tory  on the left.  Any
directory can be specified as the root of  the  tree.   The  default
starting  place  is  the  defaultsorted and displayed.  This switch accepts
                      the following options:

                      NOSORT - do no  device.   In  this  case, DirTree
displays all the partitions, and then all the  directories  in  each
partition,  and  then    	
ot  }
                            { area is 128 blocks (32K). }
  StartBlk      =BootLength;{ The block number of the FIBlk ofure FSClose(UserFile:FileID; Blks,Bits:Integer);
procedure FSBlkRead(UserFile:FileID; Block:BlkNumbers; Buff:PDirBlk);
procedu the first}
                            { user file. }
  SysFile       = -1;       { File ID of the system area on disk. }
  re FSBlkWrite(UserFile:FileID; Block:BlkNumbers; Buff:PDirBlk);
procedure FSInit;
procedure FSMount(disk : integer);
procedured syntax of directories
  5 Mar 81  BAM   V5.0    Removed many procedures into FileUtils; removed
                           SEARCHSIZELIST = 5;       { Max number of directories on search list. }
                                 
type
  DirBlk= RecoImport of DiskIO from export; changed size of
                           FileName strings; improved Scan;

  3 Mar 81  BR andrd                      { Record for reading disk blocks }
           Case Integer Of 
           2: (
                Buffer JPS    Improve setting of dates in FSEnter/FSClose/FSLookUp.
                  V4.2    Set FileType in FSEnter.
             :Array[0..255] Of Integer
              );
           3: (
                ByteBuffer: Packed Array [0..511] of FSBit8
                  Make Id a Var parameter ro FSScan as it should be.

  1 Mar 81  BR    V4.1    Set Dates in FSEnter/FSClose.

 2         )
           End;

  PDirBlk= ^DirBlk;
       
  FileID        = integer;
  BlkNumbers    = integer;
      
  S6 Feb 81  DAS and JPS   Added FSRename.  Exported FixFileName.
                  V4.0
----------------------------------------earchList    = array[1..SEARCHSIZELIST] of PathName;
  ptrSearchList = ^SearchList;
                      
var 
  FSDirPrefi----------------------------}

{********************} Exports {********************}

imports FileDefs from FileDefs;

cox:PathName;  {current default directory including device and part}
  FSSysSearchList: SearchList;

function FSLookUp(FileNamenst
  FSVersion     = '7.3';    { File system version number }
  BlksPerFile   =#077777;   { Max blocks in each file }
  Firs:PathName;Var BlkInFile,BitsInLBlk: Integer): FileID;
                       {uses current system search list}

function FSLotBlk      =0;         { Block number of the first data block }
                            { in a file }
  LastBlk       =#077calLookUp(FileName:PathName; Var BlkInFile,BitsInLBlk: Integer):
            FileID;    {doesn't use any search lists}

funct776;   { Block number of the last data block }
                            { in a file. }
  FIBlk         =-1;        { Block ion  FSSearch(var slist : SearchList; var FileName : PathName;
                   var BlkInFile, BitsInLBlk: integer) : FileID;number of the File Information Block }
  BootLength    = 60 + 128; { Size of the bootstrap area on disk--the }
               
                       {uses specified search list instead of system one; is
                        var so no copying; chang             { first n blocks on the disk.  the microcode }
                            { boot area is 60 blocks, the Pascal boes FileName to be full filename
                        actually used}

function  FSEnter(FileName:PathName): FileID;
proced   	
hat these
names are used no matter what name the device was given when it  was
partitioned.

Once  a  device  has  been  disle.  The screen is cleared to give  you
          a  blank page to write on.  Type I to insert the text
          that you wanmounted, it can no longer be accessed
until it has been mounted again.  It is very important  to  Dismount
filesystem floppiest to type in.  When you're finished,

            i. Press the INS  key  (upper  lefthand  corner  of
               keyboard before removing them from the drive.

See the section on "Mount" for more information.
Editor
Editor - Edit a text file
).  This is important; it's the only way
               that what you typed in will be saved.

           ii. Type Q.  The sc

The  Editor  is  used  to create or alter any text file on the PERQ.
You will probably use it very frequently, so it's  a  green is cleared again and you are
               prompted  with  a list of alternatives.  See the
               Editor documeood  idea  to
become  familiar  with it as soon as you can.  It has its own online
documentation (run Edit and press the  HELPntation for details on these.

       2. To make changes  to  an  existing  file:  Invoke  the
          editor  with the nam  key)  and  manual  (The
Editor  User's  Guide),  so this description is brief.  Three common
uses of the editor are discussee of an existing file.  Work with
          the Editor User's Guide at  your  side  until  you're
          comfortable with td here.  The command  line  for  Edit
is:

            EDITOR FileSpecification

or

            EDITOR/replay

If the he functions available.

          If  you  find that you've made changes to a file that
          isn't yours or that you'veswitch is left out Edit will assume that you want to edit the
default file name remembered by the Shell.  The  /REPLAY  switch  done irreparable damage to
          one  that  is,  don't  panic - if, after typing Q you
          type E, all  of  the  ch is
useful  when disaster occurs during an edit session; you specify the
switch, redo the edit session, and stop just  before anges  you've  made  will  be
          ignored.
          If  you'd like to save your changes but don't want to
          al the  disaster.
Refer to the Editor User's Guide for details.

The Editor does extension completion on the file name specifieter the source file, you can type W after Q to make
          a new file.

       3. To  read  a  file  at  your leisure: youd.  If
the file to edit is FOO.PAS, it is only necessary to type FOO.   The
extensions  that  the  Editor knows about, in orde can EDIT it,
          reading and scrolling at your own pace.  To safeguard
          against  your  having  made any accider tried, are: Pas,
Micro, Cmd, and Dfs.

The Editor signals the end of a file with  a  solid,  left  pointing
triangle.

Tntal changes to
          the file, type E after Q.
FileUtilities>ExpandTabs
ExpandTabs - Change TABs to multiple spaces

he Dismount command detaches  devices  from  the  filesystem.   The
argument to Dismount is HARDDISK (H) or FLOPPY (F).  Note three common uses of the Editor are:

       1. To create a new file: Invoke the editor with the name
          of your new fi !  	
--------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised if file entered is illegal because:
              e exports the Types put in the FileType field of File FIBs.  The
 types are stored as integers.  Three Rivers reserves the firs1) the device or partition specified is not valid
              2) a directory name specified does not exist
              3) t 512 types for
 their use.  Customers are encouraged to choose numbers > 512 if they invent
 new file types
 
 Written by Bthe length of the simpleName is > 25 characters
            If this exception is not handled by the client, the Enter will
   rad A. Myers  Feb. 2, 1981
 
 Copyright (C) 1980 Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{-----------------------------------------         return zero 
  Parameters: name is the name that is illegal
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Vers-----------}

Function FSInternalLookUp(FileName:PathName; Var BlkInFile,BitsInLBlk:Integer):
                FileID;

Exceions:
      V1.2  1-May-81  Brad Myers   Added SwapFile and BadFile
                                   Changed name of BootFile FSDismount(disk : integer);

procedure FSSetPrefix(prefixname : PathName);  {FSSetPrefix just assigns the
                 ption FSDirClose;
{--------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised if attempt to FSClo                               vble; use FileUtils.FSSetPath
                                                to do processing ose a directory file.  This is usually
            a bad idea since directories are spare files with an invalid
            lenn new path}

procedure FSGetPrefix(var prefixname : PathName);
function  FileIDtoSegID(id : FileID) : SegID;
function  SegIDgth field. 
  RESUME: Allowed.  Will close the file as if nothing had happened.
----------------------------------------------toFileID(id : SegID) : FileID;
procedure FSSetupSystem(bootchar: integer);
procedure FixFilename(var filename : PathName; null----------------------}

const
  FSDebug = false;

{********************} Private {********************}
                 iserror : boolean);
Function FSIsFSDev(name: PathName; var devName: String): integer;

Exception FSNotFnd(name: PathName);
{ --------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised if file looked up is not found.  If thi s exception is not
            handled by client, the lookup or search will return zero
  Parameters: name is the name not fou nd
--------------------------------------------------------------------}

Exception FSBadName(name: PathName);
{------------Module FileTypes;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:

 This modul ! 	
can  also
specify  a  switch  to show context, ignore upper and lower case, or
request help.  Thus, an example command line isis processing a command, a "hand" cursor moves down the
right  margin  of  the screen.  When it has reached the bottom, your
o:

     FindString screen, :boot>os>*.pas~screen.users/nocontext

The above command directs FindString to search all files wperation is complete.  (With small files, the cursor does not reach
the bottom of the screen.)

The  wild  card  handling  in



ExpandTabs simulates tabs in every 8th column by replacing  tabs  in
the  input  file  with  the correct number of spacith a .PAS
extension  in  the  OS  directory  of  the  BOOT  partition  for  an
occurrence of the string screen.  FindString wes.  ExpandTabs is
used when the input file was written for another system and put onto
a  PERQ,  which  does  not support tabrites  the  output  to
the  file  "screen.users".   By default, case is not significant (in
the example above, Screen matches s.  Its command line takes the
form:

               EXPANDTABS SourceFile DestinationFile

Note that the ExpandTabs commanscreen).  You can force FindString
to  match  upper  case  characters  by specifying the /CASESENSITIVE
switch.  FindString ald does not accept the Help switch.
FindString
FindString - Search multiple files for a given string



The FindString comso accepts the /HELP switch.
Devices>Floppy
Floppy - Do file operations on floppy disks



The FLOPPY utility formats, temand searches through a  number  of  files  for  a
particular  string.   There are two modes: /CONTEXT; and /NOCONTEXT.
In /COsts, reads, and  writes  RT-11  format
and  filesystem  floppy  disks.   FLOPPY  can also format filesystem
floppies.  You canNTEXT mode, FindString prints leading and trailing  characters
for  each  occurrence  of the specified string.  In /NOCONTEXT m use FLOPPY to transfer  files  between  the  hard
disk and the floppy disk.  The command line is:

            FLOPPY [commaode,
FindString prints only the first occurrence of the specified  string
and does not print leading or trailing characters.  nd][/switch(es)]

To  execute a single FLOPPY command and return control to the Shell,
enter a command on the command line.
The default mode
is to print leading and  trailing  characters  for  each  occurrence
(/CONTEXT).

The  first  argument  to 
To execute multiple FLOPPY functions, type FLOPPY and press  return.
In  this case, the utility prompts with FLOPPY>.  You caFindString is the string to search for.  If
you want to include a space, comma (,), or slash (/) in  the  search
string,  you n then enter
commands or use the pop-up menu.

Some FLOPPY commands require confirmation.  This confirmation  comes
from the must  precede  it  with  a single quote (').  The next
argument is the file pattern to match files against.  The  remaining
a keyboard even if a user command file is in use.  If you use
the FAST command (see below), no confirmation is required.  The Zerguments  are  optional.   You  can  direct FindString to write the
occurrence(s) to a file by specifying an output file.  You ro
and  Format commands, however, require an explicit /NOCONFIRM switch
to override the confirmation request.

While FLOPPY  "  	
de output}
      MicroFile = 11;
      ComFile = 12;
      RelFile = 13;
      IncludeFile = 14; {included in a pas file}
 1  BAM  V1.4     Added exceptions;
 16 Apr 81  BAM  V1.3     Fixed so Rename xx to y>..>y works;
 28 Mar 81  BAM  V1.2     Rem     SBootFile = 15; {system part of boot file}
      MBootFile = 16; {microcode part}
      SwapFile = 17; {a file used for soved SetPath routine (is in shell);
                          Changed Push and Pop to take SearchList as argument.
           wapping by compiler or editor; length
                        not set}
      BadFile = 18;  {created by the scavenger}
                     Added AddToTitleLine procedure so programs will
                           display the current path
 26 Mar 81 

{\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\} PRIVATE {/////////////////////////}
                                                           BAM  V1.1     Changed MakeDirectory so doesn't uppercase the name;
                            checks to see if file exists; a nd changes the arg
                            to be the full path name of the new directory
                          Added hmodule FileUtils;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------
{Abstract: 
{
{ Filesystem utilitieaders;
 19 Mar 81  BAM  V1.0     PERQ_String;
 17 Mar 81  BAM  V0.3     New procedures FSPushSearchItem and Pop;
 16 Mar 81 es not needed by the system
 
   Written by Brad Myers.  March 5, 1981.

--------------------------------------------------- BAM  V0.2     Fixed MakeDirectory to do more error checking;
  5 Mar 81  BAM  V0.1     Created this module by breaking off fro-------------------}

{----------------------------------------------------------------------
 Change log:

  2 Dec 81  BAm FileSystem;
                           Also Made FSScan faster; added FSMakeDirectory
--------------------------------------e to SBootFile to
                                     remove name conflict
      V1.1 31-Mar-81  Brad Myers   Added BootFile M  V1.10    Rename to its original name changes capitalization.
 30 Nov 81  BAM  V1.9     Rename of a file to its original nameand MBootFile
      V1.0  2-Feb-81  Brad Myers   Started
--------------------------------------------------------------------- works.
                          Exception for renaming a directory.
                          New routine FSRemoveDots.
 23--------}

{\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\} EXPORTS {/////////////////////////}

Const
      UnknownFile = 0;
      SegFile =  Jun 81  BAM  V1.8     Fixed so rename when couldn't enter file leaves it in
                           old directory
  1 Jun 1;
      PasFile = 2;
      DirFile = 3;
      ExDirFile = 4;
      FontFile = 5;
      RunFile = 6;
      TextFile = 7;  81  BAM  V1.7     Added Get and Set FSData procedures
 27 May 81  BAM  V1.6     Added new exception to rename to handle file ex   {for non-Pas text files}
      CursorFile = 8;   {cursor bin files}
      BinaryFile = 9;
      BinFile = 10;     {microcoists
 19 May 81  BAM  V1.5     Added new procedure for Extension lookup written by
                            JPS;
 12 May 8 " 	
h,  since /VERIFY is the default.  The
                    /NOVERIFY switch overrides the default.

                    NOTE:

     DUPLICATE:     This command copies  the  contents  of  one
                    floppy onto another.  The command creat This command takes a  long  time  and
                    cannot be interrupted once it starts.

     DELETE:        This  ces a
                    set of scratch  files  on  the  hard  disk,
                    copies  the  scratch  files back to tommand  deletes  a  file or multiple
                    files on the floppy.   To  delete  multiple
                    fileshe new
                    floppy, and then deletes the scratch  files
                    from  the hard disk.  To retain the, you must separate the filenames with
                    a comma (,).  By default, the  DELETE  com-
                    man scratch
                    files on the hard disk, specify the  /NODE-
                    LETE  switch.   By  default,  thed  requests confirmation before deleting
                    a file.  You can override this by  specify-
                    i Duplicate
                    command creates a double-sided floppy.   To
                    override  this  and  create  a   FLOPPY  is  more restrictive than the
operating system's.  FLOPPY only accepts wildcards  for  the  DELETE
and  DIRECTORY  cng  the  /NOCONFIRM switch.  Wildcards are
                    allowed.

     DIRECTORY:     This command lists the files conommands  (see the respective command descriptions).
In addition, the only wild card available is the asterisk (*) and it
can  tained on a
                    floppy  and optionally writes the directory
                    listing to a  file.   If  you only be used by itself in either the filename or extension part
of a file specification (or both).

Current FLOPPY commands a specify  the
                    DIRECTORY  command  with  no  arguments, it
                    lists all the files containend their switches are:



     COMPRESS:      Coalesce free space on  the  floppy.   This
                    moves  files d on the  flop-
                    py.   If  you  specify  an  input argument,
                    DIRECTORY lists those file so that all the unused blocks
                    are at the end  of  the  floppy.   COMPRESS
                    does  not as that match  the
                    specified  filename.   If  you  specify  an
                    output argument, DIRECTOccept input or output arguments,
                    but has a switch which  turns  verification
                    on  or ofRY writes the list-
                    ing to a disk file with that name, but does
                    not display the filenaf.  The default is verify; if this
                    is on, COMPRESS checks  every  transfer  to
                    assure mes  on  the  screen.
                    By  default,  the  DIRECTORY command prints
                    (or writes) a full  there are no errors.  To COMPRESS in
                    verify  mode,  you  need  not  specify  the
                    switclisting.   To  override
                    this and print only the file names, specify
                    the /SHORT switch. #  	
        Blk         : DiskAddr;
                    Entry       : Integer;
                    DirName     : PathName;
      e already exists
             2) dirName cannot be entered (bad subdir part)
             3) dirName is empty
             4)            end;
                  
Procedure FSDelete(filename: PathName);
Function  FSScan(scanptr : ptrScanRecord; var nam dirName is ROOT.DR (reserved directory name)
  Parameters:  msg explains problem with makedir attempt;
               dirNamee : SimpleName;
                 var id : FileID) : boolean;
Procedure FSRename(SrcName, DestName: PathName);
Function FSMake is name attempted to use.
              Use "WriteLn('** ',msg,dirName);"
---------------------------------------------------Directory(var DirName: PathName): FileID;
Procedure FSSetSearchList(sList: SearchList);
Procedure FSPopSearchItem(var sList: S-------------------}

Exception SrchWarn(fileName: PathName);
{--------------------------------------------------------------earchList);
Procedure FSPushSearchItem(name: PathName; var sList: SearchList);
Procedure FSAddToTitleLine(msg: String); {adds --------
   Abstract: Raised if try to Pop last item or push into last hole of the
              Search List
   Parameters: 'as much of msg as possible to
                                          title line after the current path}
Exception DelError(' if Pop; name of item trying to push if Push
   Resume: ALLOWED; if resume then does the operation anyway
-------------------FileName: PathName);
{----------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised when can't del---------------------------------------------------}

Exception SrchErr(fileName: PathName);
{-------------------------------ete file (because not there)
  Parameters: FileName is file that can't delete
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised if try to Pop empty list or push onto full list for the
           ----------------------}

Exception RenError(msg: String; FileName: PathName);
{----------------------------------------------   Search List
  Parameters: '' if Pop; name of item trying to push if Push
  Resume: NOT allowed
---------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised when can't rename file
  Parameters: msg is reason can't rename and fileName is fi-------------------------------------------}

Function FSExtSearch(var SList : SearchList; Extensions: String; 
             le with the
               problem.  To print message, use "WriteLn('** ',msg,filename);"
------------------------------------        var FileName : PathName;
                     var BlksInFile, BitsInLBlkInLBlk: Integer) : FileID;
                   --------------------------------}


{********************} Exports {********************}

imports FileSystem from FileSys----------------------------------}

Exception MkDirErr(msg: String; dirName: PathName);
{-----------------------------------tem;

type
  ptrScanRecord = ^ScanRecord;
  ScanRecord    = record
                    InitialCall : boolean;
            -----------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised when can't make a directory because
             1) a file named dirNam # 	
s command copies the disk files  created
                    by  Floppyget  onto  a floppy disk.  By de-
                    f before  overwrit-
                    ing  it.  Other forms of the command permit
                    you  to  name  the  harault, Floppyput  deletes  the  disk  files
                    after  copying them to the floppy.  You can
                   d  disk  file.   For
                    example:


                         GET floppyfile~harddiskfile


               specify the /NODELETE  switch  to  override
                    this  action.   For  single-sided floppies,
                       To  specify multiple files, use the follow-
                    ing construct:


                       GET f1,f2,...f   you must use the /SINGLESIDED switch.

     FAST:          When issued as a command,  FAST  turns  off
                   n~h1,h2,...hn



                    Like the COMPRESS command,  GET  takes  the
                    /VERIFY  and  /NOVERIF requests  for  confirmation  for all subse-
                    quent commands except Format and Zero.  Use
                 Y  switches.  The de-
                    fault is /VERIFY.

                    The GET command requires  confirmation  be-   the  FAST  command only in conjunction with
                    command files.

     FORMAT:        This command  formats 
                    fore  overwriting  a file on the hard disk.
                    You can specify the  /NOCONFIRM  switch  t a  floppy  disk  and
                    destroys  its current contents.  The FORMAT
                    command accepts the o
                    override this action.

     HELP:          When  issued  as  a  command, HELP provides
               following switches:

                         /DblDensity=Yes or No (default is no)
                         /Noconfirm (over     general information for the FLOPPY utility.
                    You  can  get  specific  help  by using the
             single-sided
                    floppy, you must specify  the  /SINGLESIDED
                    switch.   Remember that the bride request)
                         /Singlesided=Yes or No (default is no)
                         /Test=Yes or No (defaullank floppy to
                    be  duplicated  must  have  been  formatted
                    prior to invoking Duplicatet is no)

     GET:           This  command  copies  one  or  more floppy
                    files to the hard disk.   In  i.

     FLOPPYGET:    This command copies the contents of a floppy
                    disk to the hard disk.  You can  optiots  simplest
                    form, you specify only an input filename to
                    copy from the floppy to the hnally
                    specify a hard disk file name.  The Floppy-
                    get command accepts the /SINGLESIDEDard disk.  GET
                    then  copies  the  floppy  file to the hard
                    disk  using  the  same  fil switch
                    to  permit  you  to  specify a single-sided
                    floppy.

     FLOPPYPUT:     Thiename.   If  the
                    filename  already  exists on the hard disk,
                    GET requests confirmation $  	

{ Abstract:
{       GetTimeStamp implements the read-time-as-TimeStamp function for the
{       Clock module.  See the Clock                         
Exception RenToExist(fileName: PathName);
{-----------------------------------------------------------module for more details.
{
{ Design:
{       GetTimeStamp is a separate module so that it may be imported into the
{       r-----------
  Abstract: Raised when try to rename to a file that already exists.  Not 
            raised if renaming a file tesident system without importing all the other Clock routines.  Once
{       virtual memory is implemented, GetTimeStamp and Clo its own name (no-op).
  Parameters: fileName - new name that already exists
  Resume: ALLOWED; If you wish to rename anyway;ock should be merged
{       into a single module.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------------- just continue and FSRename
           will delete the DestName; In this case; you should be prepared
           to accept Del------}

{ V1.4   1 Jun 81  Brad Myers.
{ Add comments.
{ }

{ V1.3  18 May 81  Brad Myers.
{ Change IO to IO_Others.
{Error;
----------------------------------------------------------------------}

Exception RenDir(fileName: PathName);
{----- }

{ V1.2   2 Mar 81  John Strait.
{ Don't export IO.
{ }

{ V1.1   2 Mar 81  John Strait.
{ Add title, copyright, abstr-----------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised when try to rename a directory.
  Parametact.
{ Add version number.
{ Add change history retroactively.
{ }

{ V1.0   1 Feb 81  John Strait.
{ Start file.
{ }

ers: fileName - name of the source directory.
  Resume: ALLOWED; If you wish to rename anyway; just continue and FSRename
    
{/////////////////////////} Exports {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

const GetTSVersion = '1.4';


type TimeStamp = packed re       will do the operation.  RenToExist etc. may still be raised.
-----------------------------------------------------------cord
       { the fields in this record are ordered this way to optimize bits }
       Hour:   0..23;
       Day:    1..31;
-----------}

Procedure FSGetFSData(id: FileID; pData: ptrFSDataEntry);
Procedure FSSetFSData(id: FileID; pData: ptrFSDataEnt       Second: 0..59;
       Minute: 0..59;
       Month:  1..12;
       Year:   0..63;  { year since 1980 }
       end;

ry);
Procedure FSRemoveDots(var fname: PathName);


{********************} Private {********************}
                      TimeReference = record
                       Lower: Integer;
                       Upper: Integer
                    module GetTimeStamp;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       GetTimeStamp -    end;

procedure GetTStamp( var Stamp: TimeStamp );


var PastStamp: TimeStamp;
    Past: TimeReference;

{///////////Perq get time routine.
{       J. P. Strait       1 Feb 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{//////////////} Private {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}
                                                                             $ 	
ls the GET command, but
                    transfers a file or  files  from  the  hard
                    disk to the floppy       end of the file.

     COMPARE:        This command  takes  a  disk  file  and  a
                    floppy  file  (i disk.  PUT also requires
                    confirmation before overwriting an existing
                    file  on  the  fn  that  order) and ensures
                    that all  bytes  are  identical.   You  can
                    specify  multiloppy  (override  this with
                    /NOCONFIRM)  and,  like  GET,  accepts  the
                    /VERIFY and /Nple  disk  files (input argu-
                    ments) and multiple  floppy  files  (output
                    arguments)  OVERIFY switches.

     QUIT:          Exits the FLOPPY utility.

     RENAME:        Changes  the name of a floppy file.  Ifor  the  comparison.   If  you
                    specify multiple arguments, you must  sepa-
                    rate  likef the
                    new filename already  exists,  RENAME  asks
                    for  confirmation  before  overwriti  arguments  by  a  comma (,) and
                    delimit input form output arguments with an
                    equal  sng  it.
                    You can override this with  the  /NOCONFIRM
                    switch.

     DENSITY:         Tign  (=).  COMPARE prints a message
                    for every block that contains a difference.

     ZERO:          Thishis  command  tells the user whether the
                    floppy is single or double density.

     TYPE:          This co command creates a new directory on the
                    floppy.  By default, the directory  matches
                    thmmand types a  floppy  file  on  the
                    screen.   The  "hand" cursor tells how much
                    of fie number of sides on the floppy.  You can
                    override this by  specifying  the  /SINGLE-
                    le has  been  typed.   When  the  Type
                    command  finds a formfeed character (^^L) in
                    thSIDED  switch.   The  Zero  command  always
                    requests confirmation before  creating  the
                  e  file,  it  waits  after  displaying  a
                    screenful  of  text.  This enables the user
                      directory.   You  can override this only by
                    specifying the /NOCONFIRM switch.   In  the
                to read  the  page  before  the  screen  is
                    erased  and  the  next  page displayed.  To
                      process  of creating the new directory, the
                    ZERO command destroys the contents  of  the
                     /HELP switch.  Note  that  HELP  and  /HELP
                    override  any  other  commands or switches;
             continue reading, type ^^Q.  You can disable
                    this wait feature by specifying the /NOWAIT
                        FLOPPY displays the requested help and then
                    reprompts.

     PUT:           This command paralle     switch.  The Type command displays a solid,
                    left  pointing triangle when it reaches the
              %  	
conflicts (especially get)
}


exports
 const GpibVersion = '1.3';
       gpBufSize = 32;
       gpBufMax = 31; {gpBufSizf}
                              gphdfa,    {Holdoff all data}
                              gphdfe,    {Holdoff on End}
    e - 1}
 { the following codes are the IEE488-1975 Controller Command Codes
   they are issued by the Controller-In-Charge whil                          gpnbaf,    {Set NewByteAVailable false}
                              gpfget,    {Force Group Executee asserting ATN }
       gpacg = #000; {addressed group command}
       gpdcl = #024; {device clear}
       gpget = #010; {gr Trigger}
                              gprtl,     {Return to Local}
                              gpfeoi,    {force End or Idoup execute trigger}
       gpgtl = #001; {go to local}
       gplag = #040; {listen address group}
       gpllo = #021; {locentify}
                              gplon,     {Listen Only}
                              gpton,     {Talk Only}
         module gpib;
{-----------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{    Support routines for PERQ GPIB al lockout}
       gpmla = #040; {my listen address}
       gpmta = #100; {my talk address}
       gpmsa = #140; {my secondardevices.  The package maintains a
{    buffer (gpCommandBuffer) which holds either data bytes (sent with
{    procedure gpPutBy address}
       gpppc = #005; {parallel poll configure}
       gpppe = #140; {parallel poll enable}
       gpppd = #160; {pyte) or Auxiliary commands (sent with gpAuxCommand).
{    The buffer is sent to the 9914 when full, or when gpFlushBuffer is
{arallel poll disable}
       gpppu = #025; {parallel poll unconfigure}
       gpscg = #140; {secondary copmmand group}
          called.  If the buffdr has data bytes when gpAuxCommand is called,
{    it will do a gpFlushBuffer.  Similarly, when gpPutB gpsdc = #004; {selected device clear}
       gpspd = #061; {serial poll disable}
       gpspe = #060; {serial poll enable}
 yte is called,
{    it will flush the buffer, if auxiliary commands are in
{    gpCommandBuffer.
{
{  writen by Brian Rosen      gptct = #011; {take control}
       gptag = #100; {tahk address group}
       gpuag = #020; {universal address group}
 
            Copyright(C) 1980, Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{------------------------------------------------------------      gpunl = #077; {unlisten}
       gpunt = #137; {untalk}
 type  { these commands are the major state change control comman----
{
{   Change log:
{  
  27 Jan 82  V1.3  WJH added GPIBerror
                       added first test of gpBufPtr in gpds
         of the TMS9914 chip which forms the interface to the GPIB
         Consult the TI documentation on the TMS9914 forAuxCommand
            
  15-Jun-81  V1.2  DAS Changed to compiler under POS D.
  
  2-Jan-81   V1.1  BR  fixed names of Con more information}
       
       {These definitions are order dependent}
       gpAuxiliaryCommands = (gpswrst,   {Chip Resetroller Command Codes and
                       apAuxiliaryCommands to have "gp" prefix
                       to avoid name t}
                              gpdacr,    {Release DAC holdoff}
                              gprhdf,    {Release RFD holdof % 	
s passive.
        They'll follow this script:

            PERQ #2: Runs FTP
            PERQ #1: Runs FTP and then issues s switches to the GET  or  PUT  commands.   For
example:

          FTP GET file/Mode=PDP-11/BAUD=1200/DEVICE=RS232

The  F      current floppy.  Use the ZERO command after
                    formatting a floppy (see the FLOPPY  FORMAT
            the next command
            PERQ #1: PUT SourceFile[~][DestinationFile]
            Both PERQs: #!#!#!#!#!...#!#!
                  command  description  in  this  section) or
                    whenever you wish to  destroy  the  current
                        (this appears on the screen as
                         the file is being transferred
                         a          content of a floppy.

                    Note  that when you issue the ZERO command,
                    you irrevnd a "hand cursor" moves from top
                         to bottom to show percentage
                         complete.  Whocably destroy  the  current  con-
                    tents.
Devices>FTP
FTP - Transfer files to another computer



Then the hand cursor reaches
                         the bottom, the transfer
                         is complete.)

     2.e  FTP  utility  copies  files across either the RS232 link or the
parallel line LINK to  another  PERQ  or  any  other  comput  PERQ #2 has the active role:

            PERQ #1: Runs FTP
            PERQ #2: Runs FTP and then issues the next commander  that
supports  the  FTP protocol.  You can also use FTP to transfer files
across an ETHERNET connection.  The command line
            PERQ #2: GET DestinationFile[~][SourceFile]
            Both PERQs: #!#!#!#!...#!
                        (same a is:

            FTP [command][/switch(es)]

To use the RS232 line, the two machines  must  be  connected  by  an
RS232  cs above)

The passive PERQ polls implicitly while the active machine processes
the transfer.

The valid commands for FTP arable, which goes into their RS232 ports (located between the
cables for the display and keyboard in the lower lefthand corner  e:

           GET  SourceFile[~][DestinationFile]
           PUT  SourceFile[~][DestinationFile]
           MODE mode (can of
the  back  of the PERQ).  To use the parallel line, the two machines
must be connected by a LINK cable, which plugs into thbe PERQ, VAX-11, or PDP-11;
                     default is PERQ)
           BAUD baud rate (initially set to 9600)
         e  I/O  option
board  on  a PERQ.  Once the connection is established, each machine
must run the FTP program.   Its  prompt  i  DEVICE line (either RS232, LINK, or ETHERNET)

You can specify HELP whenever FTP requests input.

You  can  call  FTP  wits  FTP>.   You  can  enter
commands directly to FTP or use the pop-up menu.

The  transfer may be performed with either machih  one  command  line.  For example, you can
specify:

          FTP GET DestinationFile

Control is returned to the commanne taking the active
role; the alternate scenarios are described below:

     1.  PERQ #1 takes the active role and PERQ #2 id interpreter Shell after that  one
command  is executed.  Additionally, you can specify the MODE, BAUD,
and DEVICE commands a &  	
pParmType = (gpOff, gpOn, gpDontCare);  {parameters for Aux Commands}
       gpByte = 0..255;    {Data byte for gpib transactio         { Set TMS9914 to be a Talker, set a device to be a listener
             This procedure takes control of the bus, unlins}
       gpRange = 0..gpBufSize;
       gpDeviceAddress = 0..31;         {legal addresses for devices on GPIB}
       gpBufstens and untalks
             all devices (including itself), and sets a listener with
             MyListenAddress then setsfer = packed array [gpRange] of gpByte;
       gppBuffer = ^gpBuffer;
 var   gpCommandBuffer: gppBuffer;      {place to put co TMS9914 to be the talker with TalkONly }
 procedure gpITalkHeListens(gpAddr: gpDeviceAddress);
 
           { Set TMS9914 tommands}
       gpBufPtr: 0..gpBufSize;          {pointer to gpCommandBuffer}
       gpHaveDataBytes, gpHaveAuxiliaryCommands:  be a Listener, set a device to be a talker
             This procedure takes control of the bus, unlistens and untalks
      boolean;{true if buffer in use}
       
{   The package maintains a buffer (gpCommandBuffer) which holds
    either Data byte       all devices (including itself), and sets a talker with
             MyTalkAddress then sets TMS9914 to be the listener ws (sent with proceedure gpPutByte)
    or Auxialiary Commands (sent with gpAuxCommand)
    The buffer is sent to the 9914 whenith ListenONly}
 procedure gpHeTalksIListen(gpAddr: gpDeviceAddress);

           { turn the BitPad (device addres #10) off } full, or when ghForceBuffer
    is called.  If the buffer has data bytes when gpAuxilairyCommand is
    called, it will do a 
 procedure gpTbltOn;
           { turn the BitPad back on again }
 procedure gpTbltOff;
           { Send a buffer of user                      gpgts,     {GoTo Standby}
                              gptca,     {Take Control Asynchronously}
        gpForceBuffer.  Similarly, when gpPutByte
    is called, it will force the buffer if auxiliary commands are in
    gpCommandBu                      gptcs,     {Take Control Synchronously}
                              gprpp,     {Request Parallel Poll}ffer
}

           { Initialze GPIB package, called once only, turns off tablet }
 procedure gpInit;
 
 
           { Sen
                              gpsic,     {Set Interface Clear}
                              gpsre,     {Set Remote Enable}
 d an auxiliary command to TMS9914
             some commands require a parameter (gpOff/gpOn) }
 procedure gpAuxCommand(gpCmd:                             gprqc,     {Request Control}
                              gprlc,     {Release Control}
          gpAuxiliaryCommands; gpParm:gpParmType);
 
           { Put a data byte or a Control byte out on the data bus
             T                     gpdai,     {Disable All Interrupts}
                              gppts,     {Pass Through next Secondary}MS9914 must be in Controller Actives State if the byte is a
             controller command byte.  Must be in Talk Only if a da
                              gpstdl,    {Set T1 Delay}
                              gpshdw);   {Shadow Handshake}
       gta byte }
 procedure gpPutByte(gpData: integer);
 
           { Sends all bytes in buffer }
 procedure gpFlushBuffer;
 
   & 	
ases the screen and then
prints a list of all commands for which help exists.   Type  one  of
these  names  (or use the pop-upents of the program as
                    well as other linkage details.   Thus,  map
                    files  are  useful  menu to specify one).  The specific
help is then printed for that command.
Program>Linker
Linker - Combine compiler outputs in  debugging user pro-
                    grams.

     /USER         -this is the default.  It specifies that the
        for execution


The Linker takes compiler-generated .Seg  files  as  its  input  and
produces a runfile with a .Run extensi             program  being  linked  is  a user program.
                    The opposite is /SYSTEM.

     /VERBOSE      -lion.  The runfile is created by
linking together all of the separately compiled modules that make up
a program.  The command lists the imports of  each  module  as  the
                    module is being processed.

     /SYSTEM       -specifies that TP  command  also accepts a switch that permits you to specify
whether or not the file to transfer is a text  file;  specify  /ne takes the form:

            LINK Source{,Source}[~runfile]{/switch}

Examples of valid command lines include

        TEXT
for text files and /NOTEXT for other files.

Sometimes the BitPad and pen can cause problems with file transfers.
If yo    LINK Program
              where Program.Seg is the output of a compilation

            LINK Program1, Program2
       u encounter any problems, unplug the pen or move it  away  from
the BitPad.

If an FTP transfer fails, the current transfer a       where Program1.seg and Program2.seg are compiler
              output files.  The output will be Program1.Run.

      borts and FTP  waits
for another command (or exits  if  invoked  with  a  command  line).
However,  if  FTP  was  invoked from      LINK Program1, Program2~Program0/VERBOSE
              where Program1.Seg and Program2.Seg are com-
              piled  a command file and the transfer
fails, it restarts the transfer and repeatedly tries again until  it
succeeds.
Help
Help - .Seg files and ProgramO.run is to be the
              runfile.  The VERBOSE switch specifies that the
              name of  Give explanations of programs or keywords


The  Help command is used to display helpful information about other
commands aeach import module is to be listed.

Any  number  of source files can be listed separated by commas.  The
switches currently nd the PERQ operating  system.   When  issued  without  an
argument,  a  message describing the PERQ and the use of PopUp menusavailable are:

     /MAP=name     -creates a map file.  If you don't specify a
                    name  after  the  equal  
is displayed.  When an argument is included, information  about  the
program  specified  by the argument will be displayed.  sign, the MAP file
                    will have the same name as the runfile with
                    a  .Map  extension.   AThe HELP key
or the Help command  without  an  argument  gets  you  to  the  help
utility,  if available.  The help utility er map file contains a
                    listing showing placement and size  of  the
                    code  and  data  segm '  	

{Abstract:
{  Raised when GPIB encounters an error indication in softstatus from
{  UnitIO or IOCRead.  The condition should81  JPS  V4.8  Split IO into several modules.
  
   6-May-81  JPS  V4.7  1. Use new form of the SetCylinder StartIO.
         be corrected and the operation
{  retried.
{  The most likely error is a timeout: IOETIM (See IOErrors).
{------------------                2. Don't bother doing 10 trys in FindSize since only
                           the last result was believed re-----------------------}

private
                                                                                           gardless of success
                           or failure.
                        3. Hang if we cannot figure out the size of  the disk.
  
  11-Apr-81  JPS  V4.6  Changes for virtual memory.
  
  19-Mar-81  BAM  V4.5  Changed name of included module s to IO_Init and IO_Proc
  
   3-Mar-81  JPS  V4.4  1) Fix LocateDskHeads and FindSize to agree with V4.3.
                  Module IO;
{-------------------------------------------}
{
{ Abstract:
{
{ PERQ Raw IO Drivers - Compatibility file.
{ Wri      2) Teach the HardDisk timeout code about multi-sector
                           operations.

  28-Feb-81  JPS  V4.3  Ntten by: Miles A. Barel
{ Copyright (C) 1980
{ Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{
{   The IO module has been split into fouo longer do conversions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers (reinstating changes made in V4.0).

  25-Feb-r modules:  IO_Init, IO>Unit,
{   IO_Others, and IO_Private.  This module is provided for 
{   compatibility.  It imports the 81  GGR  V4.2  Added setting/reading of DskFill1 in UnitIO.
                        Moved new/dispose of CB from UnitIO to IO.Ifirst three modules in its exports
{   section.  IO_Private is not exported because it provides definitions
{   which were prinit.

  16-Feb-81  BAM  V4.1  Put back in conversions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed botCursF vate in the old IO module and is used only by the
{   new IO modules.
{
{ Design:
{       1) Interrupt routines must *never*bug.  Del XXX procedures;
                        Changed to use new screen
  
   9-Feb-81  BAM  V4.0  No longer does conversdata to the 9914 }
 procedure gpSend(var gpBuf: gppBuffer; gpCount: gpRange);
           {Get a buffer of data from the 9914 ( cause segment faults.
{       2) UnitIO must increment and decrement the IOCount of the segments
{          which are involveNot implemented yet) }
 procedure gpReceive(var gpBuf: gppBuffer; gpCount: gpRange);
           { Get a byte of data from the d in IO.
{       3) Segment faults must *never* happen while interrupts are off.
{
{-----------------------------------------GPIB }
 function  gpGetByte: gpByte;
 
exception GPIBerror(SoftStatus: integer);
{--------------------------------------------}

{*******************************}   Exports   {*****************************}

Const IOVersion = '4.8';

{
  11-May- ' 	
in  critical system runfiles: Link, Shell, Login, and
System (e.g.  Login.5.run).  When you link a file, it looks  up  the
sysas a profile, it is  read
to find parameters to set up the PERQ for the user.

The  Login  command line may include switches.tem  run  file  based  on  the  version in use.  If no version is
specified, it uses the current system version (which is displ  You can also include
Login switches in a #Login section of your profile.   The  following
describes the valid Login switchesayed at
the  top  of  the  screen  when  in  the  Shell).   If  a version is
specified, a system run file with that number  is:

       /PATH=pathname
                          Sets the default path to pathname.  The
                          /PATH s  used  to  resolve
references  to  system  routines.   If  the  /SYSTEM switch is used,
however, no run file is looked for siwitch is not cumulative, if you
                          specify the switch multiple times, only
                          thnce a new system  run  file  is
created.  The syntax for creating a system run file is:

     LINK SYSTEM~SYSTEM.NewNumber/SYe last one has an effect.

       /SETSEARCH=pathname
                          Pushes pathname onto the search list.
      STEM/VERSION=NewNumber

where the /VERSION switch is optional.

To  create  runfiles  for  a  new system, you link using the                    The effect of this switch is cumulative;
                          if you specify the switch multiple times VERSION
switch after making the system runfile.  It's done like this:

LINK FileSpecification/VERSION=NewNumber
Login
Log,
                          you add additional items to the search
                          list.  If the argument is a minusthis is a system program.

     /VERSION=nn   -links  the  program with the version of the
                    system specifiin - Start using Perq



Login initiates a user's session at a PERQ.  It is called automatic-
ally  when  the PERQ is booteed by "nn".  If the run  file
                    name  ends  in a number (e.g., "LOGIN.42"),
                    then the Lind or when a user logs off using the BYE
command.  It can also be called explicitly by a user.

At boot time,  Login  asks  foker  uses  the  number  as  the
                    version  number.  This can be overridden by
                    using /VERr  the  date,  time,  your  name,  and
password.   When  you  invoke  Login,  it  asks  for  your  name and
password.  Login pSION=nn switch.

A word about versions.  Every system has a version number.  When you
create  a  new  system,  you  also  shorompts you with the format it wants these in.

It can be called explicitly with the command line:

           LOGIN [UserNamuld  use a new system version
number.  You then have to relink all  the  runfiles.   This  insures
that  the  programs executee][/switch(es)]

and will prompt you with the information it wants.

Login searches the System.Users file for  the  given  u correctly with the new system.  In order
to prevent confusion, we have put the system version number into the
name  of  certaser-name  and
validates  the  password.  The UserControl program (see below) main-
tains the System.Users file.  If the user h (  	
ions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed CursorUpdate to allow partial screen
                      -----------------------------------
 Versions:
   13-May-81  Brad A. Myers  V1.1  Added Ether3MBaud Ethernet message
   12-Ma  display and added procedure IOScreenSize to set a 
                        new size.
  
  13-Jan-81  JPS  V3.3  Move creatiy-81  Brad A. Myers  V1.0  Created
------------------------------------------------------------}

{/////////////////////////on of the IOSeg to memory manager init.
                        Move $R- to private part.

  20-Nov-80  JPS  V3.2  Initialize/} EXPORTS {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

Function IOErrString(err: integer): String;

{//////////////////////////} PRIVATE {\\\ TabFifoInx in InitTablet.
  
  17-Nov-80  JPS  V3.1  Export the interrupt table.
                        Check SystemInitial\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}
                                                                                                         ized for control-C abort.
  
  16-Nov-80  BAM  V3.0  Radically changed Cursor and Tablet interface.  New
                         time procedures.  Split into another include file.
  
  10-Oct-80  JPS  V2.2  Added support for the diagnostic display (DDModule IOErrors;
{----------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{ I/O System Error Code S).
 
  27-Sep-80  DAS  V2.1  Added timeout code to UnitIO for the
                        hard disk.
 

  19-Sep-80  DAS Definitions

 Copyright (C) 1981,1982 - The Three Rivers Computer Corporation
----------------------------------------------- V2.0  Added code for 24 MByte disks.
} 


Imports IO_Init from IO_Init;
Imports IO_Unit from IO_Unit;
Imports IO_Others f-----------------}
{----------------------------------------------------------------
 Versions:
    V1.2  13-May-81  Brad A. rom IO_Others;


{*******************************}   Private   {*****************************}
                             Myers  Added new error for Ether3MBaud errors
    V1.1  12-May-81  Brad A. Myers  Added new errors and First and last
    V1.0   ??-???-??  ??             Started
----------------------------------------------------------------}

Exports

Imports SysModule IOErrMessages;
{------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{ This module exports atemDefs from SystemDefs;  {using Ether3MBaud}

Const
        IOEIOC = 1;       { IO Complete }
        IOEIOB = 0;       { I procedure to return an  error string for a disk
   error
 
 Written by : Brad A. Myers  May 12, 1981
 Copyright (C) 1981 - O Busy }
        IOEBUN = -1;      { Bad Unit Number }
        IOENBD = -2;      { Raw Block IO to this device is not implemenThree Rivers Computer Corporation
{------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------------ted }
        IOEWRF = -3;      { Write Failure }
        IOEBSE = -4;      { BlockSize Error }
        IOEILC = -5;      { I ( 	
nction.
                          Since the cursor function determines
                          the screen color also, this s                   BLACK - bottom is opposite color of
                          background

       /COMMAND=string
        witch can be
                          used to set the default screen color.

                          Valid cursor function                  Execute the specified string as the
                          first Shell command after login
              s are the integers
                          0 through 7 inclusive.
                          The integers signify the followi            and before accepting commands from the
                          keyboard.

       /SHELL=filename
             ng:

                          0 - screen is all white
                          1 - only cursor displays
                               Specify an alternate command
                          interpreter to run instead of the Shell.
                         2 - white on black, cursor is large square
                          3 - black on white, cursor is large square
               This is an aid in debugging a new or
                          user written command line interpreter.

       /PROFI                    4 - black on white, black cursor hides
                              image
                          5 - wLE=filename
                          Specifies a file (filename) to execute as
                          the profile file.
hite on black, white cursor hides
                              image
                          6 - black on white, cursor inv
       /HELP
                          Displays a brief explanation of the Login
                          Utility.

A samperts
                          7 - white on black, cursor inverts

                          If you like white letters on a ble profile for login might be:

      #Login  /Path=Sys:User>MyName>
              /SetSearch=Sys:Boot>Library>
            lack
                          background, use CURSORFUNCTION 5.

                          The default value is 4.

        /SetSearch=Sys:Part3>Alt7>
              /CursorFunction=4

Note  that  the  command  names  in  the profile can be abbrevi /SCREENBOTTOM=option
                          Sets the default parameters for
                          the bottom of the scated.
Additional documentation for Login  can  be  found  in  the  section
"Turning on the PERQ" in the PERQ Introductory User sign
                          (-), the last path is popped from the
                          list.  Note that the last itemreen when you
                          change the screen size with a
                          ScreenSize command (see below) specified
                          is the head of the searchlist and the
                          first item specified is t.

                          Valid options for this command are:

                          ON - displays bits stored in arehe end of the
                          list.

       /CURSORFUNCTION=n
                          Sets the default cursor fua
                          OFF - bottom is all one color
                          WHITE - bottom matches background
        )  	
   { Disk recalibrate done }
        IOET0  = -30;     { Can't find track zero }
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
        IOEPTL = -31y-81  JPS  V5.4  Initialize new KeyEnable flag.
  
  16-Apr-81  GGR  V5.3  Add 3MHz Ethernet Drivers (JEB).
  
   1-Apr-81  ;     { Ether3 - received packet too large }
        
    IOEFirstError = -31;
{$elsec}
    IOEFirstError = -30;
{$endc}
GGR  V5.2  Moved time base to video refresh (clock is no
                        longer turned on in io_init).
  
  31-Mar-81
    IOELastError = 0;
            
Private

                                                                                 GGR  V5.1  Added 4-button mouse support.

  11-May-81  JPS  V5.0  Split IO into several modules.
  
   6-May-81  JPS  V4.7llegal Command for this device }
        IOENHP = -6;      { Nil Header Pointer }
        IOEADR = -7;      { Address Error } 
        IOEPHC = -8;      { Physical Header CRC Error }
        IOELHC = -9;      { Logical Header CRC Error }
        IOEDAC  = -10;     { Data CRC Error }
        IOEDNI = -11;     { Device Not Idle }
        IOEUDE = -12;     { Undefined Error! }
         IOENCD = -13;     { Device is not a character device }
        IOECBF = -14;     { Circular Buffer Full }
        IOELHModule IO_Init;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ IO_Init - Initialize the IS = -15;     { Logical Header SerialNum Mismatch }
        IOELHB = -16;     { Logical Header Logical Block Number Mismatch }
O system.
{ Miles A. Barel  ca. 1 Jan 80.
{ Copyright (C) 1980, Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{
{ Abstract:
{       IO_        IOECOR = -17;     { Cylinder Out of Range }
        IOEDNR = -18;     { Device not ready }
        IOEMDA = -19;     {Init initializes the Interrupt Vector Table, the Device Table and
{       associated buffers, the Screen Package, the tablet an Missing data address mark }
        IOEMHA = -20;     { Missing header address mark }
        IOEDNW = -21;     { Device not d cursor, and
{       the Z80.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{  
  1writable }
        IOECMM = -22;     { Cylinder mis-match }
        IOESNF = -23;     { Sector not found }
        IOEOVR = -6-Nov-81  DAS  V5.9  (JPS)  Put in John's code for Megabyte memory.

   4-Nov-81  DAS  V5.8  Added code for the 10 MBaud Ether24;     { Overrun }
        IOEUEF = -25;     { Undetermined equipment fault }
        IOESOR = -26;     { Sector out of rangenet.

   1-Jul-81  BAM  V5.7  Changed name of Screen to ScreenOut

  25-Jun-81  JPS  V5.6  Change EnableTablet to InitGPIB a }
        IOETIM = -27;     { Time out error }
        IOEFRS = -28;     { Floppy recalibrate done }
        IOEDRS = -29;  nd do not enable
                        the tablet.
  
   3-Jun-81  JPS  V5.5  Add Virgil headers and commands.
  
  23-Ma ) 	
 Manual.
MicroCode>MakeBoot
MakeBoot - Enable booting a new system



MakeBoot  writes  boot  files onto hard disk and fl FileSystem  (as
     opposed  to  FLOPPY)  floppies before you remove them from
     the floppy drive.  If you fail to do thioppy disk.  It is
self-prompting.  Its command line is:

              MAKEBOOT [RunFile]

See the section "Booting the Macs, the next floppy
     put  into  the drive may be overwritten and the fileSystem
     floppy is also likely to be corrupted.hine" in the PERQ Introductory  User
Manual  for  more  details on booting.  The manual How to Make a New
System gives complet

     2.  Floppies written with the  FLOPPY  program  cannot  be
     mounted or dismounted.

     3.  A device may be moue description of the MakeBoot program.
FileUtilities>MakeDir
MakeDir - Create a new directory



MakeDir creates a new emnted more than once.

     4.   It's a bad idea to dismount the device you're running
     from.  If you do, the system will pty directory.  Its command line is:

          MAKEDIR [FileSpecification]

where FileSpecification is the name for the newnot be able to find  the
     Shell.
MicroCode>ODTPRQ
ODTPRQ - Debug microcode across a Link




ODTPRQ is a simple deb directory.   If  you
do  not  specify  the  name  you  will  be  prompted  for  it.   All
directories have a .Dr extension; Mugger for microcode and new operating systems.
ODTPRQ runs on a PERQ other than the one that is being debugged.  It
communicatakeDir will provide this automat-
ically if you do not specify it.

MakeDir  will  not accept as its parameter the name ROOT es  through  a  Link  board  that  is plugged into the I/O
option slot in the card cage.  ODTPRQ has an online  help  facility.or the name
of any extant file that has a .Dr extension; it will print an  error
message if you pass it such a name.

See  t
The ODTPRQ command line is:

             ODTPRQ [StateFileName]

where StateFileName is the name of a State File.
FileUhe PERQ Introductory User Manual for more information on files
and directories.
FileUtilities>Mount
Mount - Start using devitilities>Partition
Partition - Reorganize disk



Partition  creates  new partitions on a device (such as hard disk or
floce



The Mount command is used  to  attach  devices  to  the  filesystem.
Devices  must be mounted before files on them cappy).  It can also be used to  modify  the  names  and  sizes  of
existing partitions.  Creating a new partition destroys all on be accessed by the
fileSystem.  The two Mount commands are:

      MOUNT H[ARDDISK]

and

      MOUNT F[LOPPY]

Note ld data
in the area where the partition is made.  The device should first be
formatted  before  using  Partition.  After formathat these are the forms to use no matter what the name devices
were  given  when  partitioned.   The device that was booted frtting, Partition is
the first program to run.  Its command line is:

           PARTITION

The  program  is  self-promptingom is
mounted automatically by the system.


Notes on Mount and Dismount:

     1.  It is imperative  that  you  dismount .   Refer  to  "Partitions  and  the
Partition Program" in PERQ File System Utilities Manual before using
it.
FileUtilities> *  	
            Moved new/dispose of CB from UnitIO to IO.Init.

  16-Feb-81  BAM  V4.1  Put back in conversions on Disk Physical  block
                        numbers; fixed botCursF bug.  Del XXX procedures;
                        Changed to use new scr een
  
   9-Feb-81  BAM  V4.0  No longer does conversions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed CursoModule IO_Others;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ IO_Others - MiscellaneourUpdate to allow partial screen
                        display and added procedure IOScreenSize to set a 
                   s IO routines.
{ Miles A. Barel  ca. 1 Jan 80.
{ Copyright (C) 1980, Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{
{ Abstract:
{          new size.
  
  13-Jan-81  JPS  V3.3  Move creation of the IOSeg to memory manager init.
                        Move $R-  IO_Others exports routines for the Cursor, Table, Screen, Time, and
{       Keyboard.
{
{---------------------------------- to private part.

  20-Nov-80  JPS  V3.2  Initialize TabFifoInx in InitTablet.
  
  17-Nov-80  JPS  V3.1  Export the interr-------------------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  1. Use new form of the SetCylinder StartIO.
                        2. Don't bother doing 10 trys in FindSize since only
   upt table.
                        Check SystemInitialized for control-C abort.
  
  16-Nov-80  BAM  V3.0  Radically changed                         the last result was believed regardless of success
                           or failure.
            Cursor and Tablet interface.  New
                        time procedures.  Split into another include file.
  
  10-Oct-80              3. Hang if we cannot figure out the size of the disk.
  
  11-Apr-81  JPS  V4.6  Changes for virtual memory.
  
JPS  V2.2  Added support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
 
  27-Sep-80  DAS  V2.1  Added timeout code to UnitIO for the
     19-Mar-81  BAM  V4.5  Changed name of included modules to IO_Init and IO_Proc
  
   3-Mar-81  JPS  V4.4  1) Fix LocateDskHea                     hard disk.
 

  19-Sep-80  DAS  V2.0  Added code for 24 MByte disks.
} 

{**************************ds and FindSize to agree with V4.3.
                        2) Teach the HardDisk timeout code about multi-sector
            *****}   Exports   {*****************************}




Procedure InitIO;


{*******************************}   Private                 operations.

  28-Feb-81  JPS  V4.3  No longer do conversions on Disk Physical block
                        n {*****************************}
                                                                                              umbers (reinstating changes made in V4.0).

  25-Feb-81  GGR  V4.2  Added setting/reading of DskFill1 in UnitIO.
              * 	
s:

         PATH [pathname]

Path  does not affect the search list.  If Path is called without an
argument, it prints the S232



Print prints files to a GPIB printer.  Its command line is:

               PRINT [FileSpecification]

If the Ficurrent path.  A new path can then be  typed
or Carriage Return to exit without changing the path.  The final ">"
of a directoleSpecification is omitted, you will be prompted for one.

If  the  printer  is connected to the RS232 port, Print requires Z8ry name is optional for the path command so  "Path  Foo"
changes  the path to the directory foo.Dr.  Path will print an error
0
PROMs version 8.5 (or higher) for proper operation.  These two PROMs
are located on the "IO" board (red color-coded) and arePatch
Patch - Modify a disk block



Patch allows you to examine and modify the contents of a disk  file.
To run it, type:message if you try to Path  to  a  nonexistant  directory.   If  you
attempt to set a Path from which the Shell cannot be acces

             PATCH [filename]

If  you  have not specified a filename or if the specified file does
not exist, PATCH promsed (which
can happen if you change the SearchList),  Path  requires  confirma-
tion.
Pause
Pause - Stop execution until REpts for the filename.   When  it  has  a  valid
file, it prompts with:

            Read Block [0]?

Type  return  to  lookTURN



Pause  can  be  used  to suspend the execution of a command file and
wait for user confirmation before proceeding.  at the block number in brackets or type a new
block number.  You can also type HELP for some online  documentation
that descr It takes a message as
a  parameter, prints it on the screen, and then waits for a carriage
return on the keyboard before contibes the commands you can use.

When you ask to read a block, Patch displays it byte by byte or word
by word on your screen iinuing.  This command can be given
by  the  user, but it is most useful in command files when some user
action is required befn 32-rows.  You can reference each byte with
the  indices  0  to  511.   Patch  permits  you to make temporary or
permanent chore proceeding, e.g., changing floppies.
Perq.Files.Help
Perq.Files - Software Index maintenance program



Part of the danges to your file.

To access all hard disk blocks, you can patch the SYS: file.
FileUtilities>Path
Path - Change to anothocumentation for each PERQ operating system is  a  file
called  PERQ.Files  which  describes all the files in the system and
ser directory



Your "path" is the directory you are currently using.  To find named
files,  the  system  will  first  looktates which part of the system they are in.  The PERQ.Files program
is  used  to  list  portions of the PERQ.Files text file an in this directory and then in
directories specified in your search list.  (See  SetSearch  below).
New  files  are  created id to make
command files.  Run the program by typing:

            PERQ.Files

and type "Help" when you are prompted.   The n this directory if a different one is not
specified.  The Path command changes  the  current  directory.   The
command line i program  types  out  a
comprehensive description on how to use the program.
Devices>Print
Print - Print a file to GPIB or R +  	
 and reading the
                        cursor pattern must use IncIOCount to ensure that the
                        client'  Put back in conversions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed botCursF bug.  Del XXX procedures;
   s segment is swapped in.

   4-Jun-81  JPS  V5.4  Export new IOKeyClear procedure.

   3-Jun-81  JPS  V5.3  Add Virgil heade                     Changed to use new screen
  
   9-Feb-81  BAM  V4.0  No longer does conversions on Disk Physical block
 rs and comments.

  23-May-81  JPS  V5.2  Replace enable/disable of control-c processing
                        (exported by                       numbers; fixed CursorUpdate to allow partial screen
                        display and added procedure  System) with enable/disable of KeyBoard
                        interrupts (exported by IO_Others).
  
  31-Mar-81  GGR  V5.IOScreenSize to set a 
                        new size.
  
  13-Jan-81  JPS  V3.3  Move creation of the IOSeg to memory mana1  Added 4-button mouse support.

  11-May-81  JPS  V5.0  Split IO into several modules.
                        Removed IOSeger init.
                        Move $R- to private part.

  20-Nov-80  JPS  V3.2  Initialize TabFifoInx in InitTablet.
  tTime procedure
  
   6-May-81  JPS  V4.7  1. Use new form of the SetCylinder StartIO.
                        2. Don't bothe
  17-Nov-80  JPS  V3.1  Export the interrupt table.
                        Check SystemInitialized for control-C abort.
  r doing 10 trys in FindSize since only
                           the last result was believed regardless of success
         
  16-Nov-80  BAM  V3.0  Radically changed Cursor and Tablet interface.  New
                        time procedures.  Split in                  or failure.
                        3. Hang if we cannot figure out the size of the disk.
  
  11-Apr-81  Jto another include file.
  
  10-Oct-80  JPS  V2.2  Added support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
 
  27-Sep-80  DAS  V2.1PS  V4.6  Changes for virtual memory.
  
  19-Mar-81  BAM  V4.5  Changed name of included modules to IO_Init and IO_Proc
  
  Added timeout code to UnitIO for the
                        hard disk.
 

  19-Sep-80  DAS  V2.0  Added code for 24 MByte
{  Change Log:
{
  28 Jan 82  WJH  V5.7  increment ErrorCnt in IOSetModeTablet

  22 Dec 81  WJH  V5.6  fix IOGetTime for c   3-Mar-81  JPS  V4.4  1) Fix LocateDskHeads and FindSize to agree with V4.3.
                        2) Teach the HardDisk tialls while booting
  
  25-Jun-81  JPS  V5.5  Add new TabletMode: offTablet which disables the
                        tabletmeout code about multi-sector
                           operations.

  28-Feb-81  JPS  V4.3  No longer do conversions on Dis.  Make all other TabletModes enable it.
                        Get rid of EnTabUpdate and EnCurUpdate--go back to
          k Physical block
                        numbers (reinstating changes made in V4.0).

  25-Feb-81  GGR  V4.2  Added setting/r              disabling and enabling interrupts during tablet and
                        cursor code.  This means that loadingeading of DskFill1 in UnitIO.
                        Moved new/dispose of CB from UnitIO to IO.Init.

  16-Feb-81  BAM  V4.1 + 	
can be loaded into the PERQ microstore.  The PERQ Microprogram-
mers Guide has details on the use of PRQPlace.
MicroCode>QDis DestinationFile.  You can
rename a file from one directory to another (move the file) as  long
as both directories are in the
QDis - Display the QCodes in a compiled .SEG file



QDis is a disassembler for Q-Code.  It  decodes  a  .Seg  file  into same partition.

Rename prompts for any missing arguments.

You  may  rename a .Run file, but if you rename a .Seg file you
Q-code.  The command line:

            QDIS

causes the following sequence:

        1.  The program identifies itself a must
re-link the programs which use it.

The source file for Rename may contain wild cards (for a description
of the wild cs QCode Disassembler.

        2.  You are then prompted for an input file.  Type the name
            of the program or moduards, see the "PERQ Introductory User Manual").  If the
source contains wild cards, the destination must  contain  the  same
wle you want disassembled.
            (Since the input to QDis is a .Seg file, the input
            file must have been compiild  cards in the same order.  In this case, Rename finds all files
in the directory which match the source pattern.  For  thesled.) You needn't specify
            .Seg but must specify extension if it is anything else.

        3.  Next, you are prome  files,
the part of the source file name that matched each wild card is used
to replace the corresponding wild card in the   labeled with
the version number.  The PROM  versions  are  not  relevant  if  the
printer  is  connected  to  the GPIB (IEEE-pted for an output file.  The default
            is CONSOLE: .

        4.  QDis displays a list of the program's routines a488) port; Print operates
correctly.  Contact Three Rivers field  service  department  to  ex-
change earlier PROM versions.
nd
            the following information about each:

                Routine name
                Routine number
         
Print expects to find the printer at GPIB address one (1).
MicroCode>PRQMic
PRQMic - Microcode assembler



PRQMic  is        Lexical level
                Parameter size
                Result + Parameter size
                Local + Temporary the  PERQ   microcode  assembler.   It takes a microcode
source program (whose extension is .MICRO), and produces output that size
                Entry address
                Exit address

        5.  QDis next will ask you which routine you'd lik
can  be  used  as  input  to  the  microplacer,  PRQPlace.  The PERQ
Microprogrammers Guide has details on how to write micrope to
            see disassembled.  Type in a routine number; the
            program then types a listing of that routine's
rograms and
how to use PRQMic.
MicroCode>PRQPlace
PRQPlace - Combine microcode and assign addresses



PRQPlace is the P            Q-code translation.

Step 5 can be repeated indefinitely.
FileUtilities>Rename
Rename - Change the name of a fiERQ microcode placer.  It takes the output from the
microassembler, PRQMic, and produces a file  (with  extension  .BIN)
that le



Typing the command line:

         RENAME SourceFile[~]DestinationFile

will  change  the  name  of  SourceFile to ,  	
   Exports   {*****************************}



Imports SystemDefs from SystemDefs; 



{ tablet/cursor procedures }

 Tablet
                                            coordinates are copied every 1/60th
                                      Type    CursFunction = (CTWhite, CTCursorOnly, CTBlackHole, CTInvBlackHole,
                        CTNormal, CTInvert, CTCursC      second into the cursor position. if
                                            indep, then coordinates are changed
    ompl, CTInvCursCompl);
        TabletMode = (relTablet, scrAbsTablet, tabAbsTablet, offTablet);
        CursMode = (OffCursor,                                        only by user.  If off, then no
                                            cursor displ TrackCursor, IndepCursor);
        CursorPattern = array[0..63,0..3] of integer;
        CurPatPtr = ^CursorPattern;


Varayed }

Procedure IOSetCursorPos(x,y: Integer); { if trackCursor is false, then sets
                                             TabRelX, TabRelY: integer;      { tablet relative coordinates }
        TabAbsX, TabAbsY: integer;      { tablet absolute  cursor x and y pos.  If tracking, then
                                         sets both tablet and cursor. }

Procedure IOcoordinates }
        TabFinger: boolean;             { finger on tablet }
        TabSwitch: boolean;             { switch puSetTabPos (x,y: Integer);  { if trackCursor is false, then sets
                                         tablet x and y pos.  Ished down }
        TabWhite   : boolean;       { True if white button down }
        TabGreen   : boolean;       { True if grf tracking, then
                                         sets both tablet and cursor }
                                      een button down }
        TabBlue    : boolean;       { True if blue button down }
        TabYellow  : boolean;       { True    
Procedure IOReadCursPicture(pat: CurPatPtr; var px, py: integer);
                                        { copies currentif yellow button down }
        TabMouse   : integer;       { Actual output from mouse }
        DefaultCursor: CurPatPtr;     cursor picture into
                                          pat and sets px and py with the 
                                 { default cursor pattern }

Procedure IOLoadCursor(Pat: CurPatPtr; pX, pY: integer);
                                                 offsets for the current cursor }



Procedure IOGetTime(var t: double);  { Get the double word 60 Hertz time }
           { load user cursor pattern }

Procedure IOReadTablet(var tabX, tabY: integer); { read tablet coordinates }

Proce        


{Procedure to change screen size}

Procedure IOScreenSize(newSize: integer; complement: Boolean);
             dure IOSetFunction(f: CursFunction);

Procedure IOSetModeTablet(m: TabletMode); { set the mode to tell what kind of
                                    { newSize is number of scan lines in
                                          new screen; must be a disks.

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{*******************************}                                  tablet is currently in use }

Procedure IOCursorMode (m: CursMode); { if track is true, then , 	
o wild cards, the destination
file name may contain, at most, one occurance of the wild card  "*".
In  this case, the non-direa convenient method to reexecute the default file remember-
ed  by  the  Shell  and  supply  new  arguments to the runfile.  Thctory part of the source replaces the "*"
in the destination.  For example,

             RENAME sys:Boot>newOS>myprog.Pas die
command line is:

     ReRun arguments

The ReRun command is most  useful  when  the  default  file  has  an
especially r3>new.*

would rename the file  "sys:Boot>newOS>myprog.Pas"  to  a  new  file
named  "dir3>new.myProg.Pas".   This is most u long name.  For example, if "Programwithlongname" is the
default file, the command:

     ReRun A b 3

is the same as typiseful when you want to
rename a file from one directory to  another  with  the  same  name.
For example,

             RENAMng:

     Programwithlongname A b 3
Program>Run
Run - Execute a program



Run is another way to invoke the  default  fE dir1>prog.Pas *

moves prog.pas from the directory "dir1" into the current directory.

If there are no wild cards in the sile  remembered  by  the
Shell.   If you have been editing, compiling and linking the default
file, simply typing:

        ource, an attempt to  include  in
the  destination name other wild card characters, besides the single
"*" discussed above, ma    RUN

executes that default file.  The Run command sets the  default  file
to the specified runfile.  For example, the comy lead to problems later.  These  extra  wild
cards  will be treated as simple literal characters.  Because a file
name with wmand:

            RUN Foo arg1 arg2

is the same as typing:

            Foo arg1 arg2

except  that  the first commandild cards in it  is  hard  to  specify,  Rename  requires
confirmation before creating a file with wild cards in the name.

I (Run Foo arg1 arg2) sets the default
file to Foo.
ScreenSize
ScreenSize - Shrink screen for next execution



The displf  the the destination file already exists, Rename requests confir-
mation before deleting.  This can be disabled by  using  thay on the PERQ screen is stored in memory and requires  48K
words  (192  blocks).   Sometimes it is advisable to give up some odestination.   As  an
example, for the command:

              RENAME foo*.abc#   anotherdir>*baz.rmn#z

The  input  file  e  switch
"/NOCONFIRM"  or  enabled  using  the switch "/CONFIRM".  /NOCONFIRM
also sets /NOASK.  If an error is discovered  a"FOOZAP.ABCD"  would  be  renamed  to the new file
"anotherdir>ZAPbaz.rmnDz".

If wild cards are used, Rename asks for verifind  wild  cards  were
used,  Rename  asks the user whether to continue processing the rest
of the files that match the input. cation  of  each  file
renamed.   This  can be disabled with the switch "/NOASK" or enabled
with the switch "/ASK." The defaul This confirmation is required no
matter what switches were specified.

A final switch is "/HELP" which describes the functiot is enabled.

Wild cards are not allowed in the directory part of the source file.

When  the  source  file name contains nn of Rename and
the various switches.
Program>ReRun
ReRun - Use new arguments and re-execute last program run


ReRun is  -  	
hich make up the IO system.
{
{ Design:
{       Interrupt routines must *never* cause segment faults.
{
{------------------ 1) Fix LocateDskHeads and FindSize to agree with V4.3.
                        2) Teach the HardDisk timeout code about multi------------------------------------------------------------}

{ 
   2 Dec-81  BAM  V5.9  Added Help switch.
  16-Nov-81  DAsector
                           operations.

  28-Feb-81  JPS  V4.3  No longer do conversions on Disk Physical block
      multiple of 
                                          128. Complement tells whether the 
                                   S  V5.8  (JPS) Put in John's changes for megabyte memory.

   4-Nov-81  DAS  V5.8  Fixed for 10 MBaud Ethernet.

  25-Jun-81       rest of the screen should be the
                                          opposite color from the displayed
            JPS  V5.7  Get rid of EnTabUpdate and EnCurUpdate since they
                        didn't work anyway.

   4-Jun-81  JPS                                 part }

{ disable/enable keyboard interrupts }

Procedure IOKeyDisable( var OldKeyEnable: Bo V5.6  Fix Beep when type ahead too far (for the last time
                        I hope).

   3-Jun-81  JPS  V5.5  Add Virgolean );

Procedure IOKeyEnable( OldKeyEnable: Boolean );

{ clear the IO type-ahead buffer }

Procedure IOKeyClear;


il headers and comments.

  23-May-81  JPS  V5.4  Use new IOKeyDisable/IOKeyEnable in place of old
                        Di{*******************************}   Private   {*****************************}
                                                 sCtlC/EnaCtlC.  Reinstate Beep when type ahead too
                        far.

  22-May-81  JPS  V5.3  Fix control-c proces sing.  Remove Beep when type
                        ahead too far.
  
  16-Apr-81  GGR  V5.2  Add 3MHz Ethernet Drivers (JEB )
  
  31-Mar-81  GGR  V5.1  Added 4-button mouse support.
  
  11-May-81  JPS  V5.0  Split IO into several modules.
  
    6-May-81  JPS  V4.7  1. Use new form of the SetCylinder StartIO.
                        2. Don't bother doing 10 trys in FindModule IO_Private;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ IO_Private - IO system Size since only
                           the last result was believed regardless of success
                           or faprivate definitions and interrupt routines.
{ Miles A. Barel  ca. 1 Jan 80.
{ Copyright (C) 1980, Three Rivers Computer Corporilure.
                        3. Hang if we cannot figure out the size of the disk.
  
  11-Apr-81  JPS  V4.6  Changes for vation
{
{ Abstract:
{       IO_Private exports interrupt routines and definitions which are private
{       to the modules wirtual memory.
  
  19-Mar-81  BAM  V4.5  Changed name of included modules to IO_Init and IO_Proc
  
   3-Mar-81  JPS  V4.4  - 	
ing off so it
shrinks the screen to allow its data and code to  fit  into  memory.
Even  when swapping is enabled, some prograr.

          /WHITE

               This switch forces the bottom of the screen area to
               the same color as tms, such as the compiler,
want to trade speed for screen size.

The ScreenSize command prompts for the number of scan lines uhe usable part of the screen.

          /BLACK

               This switch forces the bottom of the screen area to
       sed  in
the  display  for  the next program run.  The screen expands to full
size after that program has completed.  The  full        the opposite color of the general background.


The Shell shrinks the screen automatically for certain programs.  If  screen  has  1024
lines  in it.  The number you supply must be greater than zero, less
than or equal to 1024, and a multiple
you explicitly call ScreenSize before these programs are  run,  then
the Shell will not override your settings.
FileUtilitie of 128 (e.g.  128,  512,  768,
etc.).   You  can  specify  a  number  in  the range 1 through 8 and
ScreenSize will multiply s>Scavenger
Scavenger - Recover disk if file structures damaged



The  Scavenger  checks  the  filesystem's  structures  athe number by 128.   For  example,  if  you
specify  the value 4, ScreenSize multiplies 4 by 128 and uses 512 as
the number ofnd fixes any
errors found.  It can be called any time you  suspect  a  filesystem
problem  or  whenever  you  need  to reconst scan lines (512 is half of the screen).

ScreenSize accepts four switches to permit you to control the bottom
portion of theruct a directory.  It is
self-prompting.

Its command line is:

           SCAVENGE

For more  details  on  this  program display.  The switches are:

          /ON

               This switch permits you to see the data or code
               ,  see  the  section  "Scavenger
Program" in the PERQ  File System Utilities Manual.
Devices>SetBaud
SetBaud - Change baud rthat is stored in the screen area.
               The memory manager is told that the memory is
               free, but the Iate on RS232



SetBaud  allows  you  to  specify  the  baud rate to the RS232 line.
Valid baud rates are: 110; 150; 300;  O package still thinks it should be
               displayed.  The screen
               package will not let you create a win600;  1200;  2400;  4800;  and
9600.  The command syntax is:

     SetBaud 4800
FileUtilities>SetSearch
SetSearch - Changedow or write
               into that area
               (unless a program calls RasterOp or Line directly).
                list of directories to search for files



SetSearch  allows you to add and remove paths to search lists and to
change theThis switch is the default condition,
               unless an entry in the user profile has changed it
               (see Loir order.  Its command line is:

          SETSEARCH [pathname][,pathname]

If you do not specify a pathname,  SetSearch  dif
the screen and allow this memory to be  used  for  storing  data  or
programs.   For  example, the Scavenger runs with swappgin above).

          /OFF

               This switch forces the bottom of the screen area to
               a solid colo .  	
  Radically changed Cursor and Tablet interface.  New
                        time procedures.  Split into another include fileal Codes }
        PSGPIB = 0;
        PSZ80Monitor = #11;
        PSTablet = 6;
        PSKeyBoard = 7;
        PSRS232 = .
  
  10-Oct-80  JPS  V2.2  Added support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
 
  27-Sep-80  DAS  V2.1  Added timeout code to5;
        PSClock = #12;
        
        GSFloppy = #40;           { Get Status Special Codes }
        GSGPIB = #100;
   UnitIO for the
                        hard disk.
 

  19-Sep-80  DAS  V2.0  Added code for 24 MByte disks.
}

{*******      GSZ80Monitor = #10;
        GSTablet = #2;
        GSKeyBoard = #4;
        GSRS232 = #1;
        GSClock = #20;
    ************************}   Exports   {*****************************}




Imports SystemDefs from SystemDefs;
Imports IO_U    
        DisCst0 = #1154;     { consts to terminate Display List; add in funct }
        DisCst1 = #1351;
        MinCurYnit from IO_Unit;
Imports IO_Others from IO_Others;
Imports Raster from Raster;



Const
        
        CirBufSize = # = 0;           { Minimum Y value for cursor }
        MaxCurY = 1023;        { Maximum Y value for cursor }
        SegSize =                   numbers (reinstating changes made in V4.0).

  25-Feb-81  GGR  V4.2  Added setting/reading of DskFill1 in U100-3;    { size of circular buffers - made so that }
                                { total size of CirularBuffer = #100 }
 nitIO.
                        Moved new/dispose of CB from UnitIO to IO.Init.

  16-Feb-81  BAM  V4.1  Put back in conversio       
        DskBlockSize = 512;     { block sizes for fixed block size devices }
        FlpBlockSize = 128;     { Size isns on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed botCursF bug.  Del XXX procedures;
                        Ch in BYTES }
        SpkBlockSize = 128;
        TabBlockSize = 8;
        Z80BlockSize = 20;
        GPIBBlockSize = 1;
   anged to use new screen
  
   9-Feb-81  BAM  V4.0  No longer does conversions on Disk Physical block
                             Last12Sector = 202 * 4 * 30 -1; {Tracks * Heads * Sectors.  0 start }
        
        DskPriority = 0;       { interruptnumbers; fixed CursorUpdate to allow partial screen
                        display and added procedure IOScreenSize to set a  priorities }
        FlpPriority = 3;
        SpkPriority = 2;
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
        Ether3Priority = 12;
{$else
                        new size.
  
  13-Jan-81  JPS  V3.3  Move creation of the IOSeg to memory manager init.
            c}
{$ifc Ether10MBaud then}
        Ether10Priority = 12;
{$endc}
{$endc}
        GPIBInPriority = 11;
        GPIBOutPrio            Move $R- to private part.

  20-Nov-80  JPS  V3.2  Initialize TabFifoInx in InitTablet.
  
  17-Nov-80  JPS  V3.rity = 1;
        TabPriority = 10;
        KeyPriority = 5;
        RSIPriority = 6;
        RSOPriority = 7;
        Z80P1  Export the interrupt table.
                        Check SystemInitialized for control-C abort.
  
  16-Nov-80  BAM  V3.0riority = 8;
        PutPriority = 9;
        GetPriority = 4;
        
        PSFloppy = #14;           { Put Status Speci . 	
S Yes

To end the display, type the command:

     STATISTICS No

After each program is executed, the Shell prints the Sta are slow, and may be
dismounted at any time.
FileUtilities>TypeFile
TypeFile - Rapidly display a file


Type displays antistics  for
that program in the following format:

     Load     1.6 secs.
     Exec     3.6 secs.
     IO       0.8 secs.y file or files on the console.  The command line:

            TYPEFILE FileSpecification

displays a single file on the cosplays  the  current
search list and then permits you to change it or simply exit.

If  you  specify  a  file  name, SetSearc
     Swap     0.1 secs.
     Move     0.0 secs.
     Duty    97.2 percent.

Load  is  the  time  spent  loading the prograh pushes that name onto the
search list; if it is a hyphen (-), the first item on  the  list  is
popped off.

The  current  m and its modules into
memory.  Exec is the total time spent executing including  IO,  Swap
and  Move  times.   IO  is  the  tsearch  list  is  5 items deep with the first and last
slots reserved.  SetSearch gives you a warning  if  you  attempt  to
puime  spent doing Unit-level IO not
including IO time spent swapping.  Swap is the amount of time  spent
swapping.  Move is thesh  something  onto  the first slot or pop something off the last.
In addition, when you try to exit, SetSearch  checks  to  ma amount of time spent moving segments from one
place in memory to another to try to find room for  new  allocation.
Duty  factke  sure
that  the  Shell can be found with the new search list and path.  If
not, you are asked for confirmation before exitior  is the proportion of time spent in actual work.  It is
computed in the following way:

      100 * (Exec - Swap - Move) /ng.
SetTime
SetTime - Change current time



The SetTime command  allows  you  to  specify  the  date  and  time.
Specif Exec
MicroCode>Swap
Swap - Turn swapping on or off



The Swap command enables or disables the virtual memory system.  Ty the time and date as follows:

     DD MMM YY  HH:MM:SS

The time notation uses a 24 hour clock and the seconds are optionhe
command  "SWAP  NO"  turns  virtual memory off, and swaps all active
segments into memory.  "SWAP YES" turns swapping on.  al.
An example command line which sets the date to June 3, 1955 and  the
time to 3:30 PM folllows:

     SetTime 3 Jun 55  1In this  case,
you may specify a partition to use for the swap files.  For example,

     SWAP YES Sys:Boot>

enables swapp5:30

SetTime  permits  you to change only the time; if you omit the date,
you correct the time.
Statistics
Statistics - Ting to the Sys:Boot> partition.  When booting from  the
hard disk, swapping is initially enabled in the partition containing
turn on or off the display of execution statistics



The operating  system   constantly  collects  statistics  about  the
phe boot file.  If you simply specify SWAP  YES  with  no  partition
name, this default partition is used.  When booting from therformance  of  the  swapper.  To display the statistics after each
execution completes, specify the command:

     STATISTICe floppy,
swapping is initially disabled.  We discourage swapping to a  floppy
disk  because  floppies  have a small capacity, /  	
IntEnable = #4;     { Ether3 constants }
        E3TDone = #2000;
        E3TError = #4000;
        E3TGo = #10;
        E3Re=modem change }
                              RSIParErr: boolean;       { true=parity error }
                              RIntEnable = #1;
        E3RDone = #400;
        E3RPromiscuous = #20;
        E3RError = #1000;
        E3RGo = #2;
       SIOverrun: boolean;      { true=overrun error }
                              RSIError: boolean);       { OR of all error bits  E3XmtMask = E3TDone + E3TError + E3TGo;
        E3XmtSucc = E3TDone + E3TGo;
        E3RecMask = E3RDone + E3RError + E3RGo;}
                    RSOType: (RSOUnused: 0..255);
                    StdType: (StdHiByte: 0..255)
                end;
  
        E3RecSucc = E3RDone + E3RGo;
        
        PackBuffLen = 511;
        E3RecCount = PackBuffLen - 4;
        MAXE      
        
        CircularBuffer = packed record  { circular buffer used for character }
                              3RECERRS = 20;
{$endc}
        
Type
        IOPtrKludge = record case integer of
                        1: (Buffer: IOBuf          { devices, SpGetCir and SpPutCir }
                Length: integer;        { # chars in the buffer }
               Ptr);
                        2: (Offset: Integer;
                            Segment: Integer)
                        end; RdPtr: integer;         { where to get chrs out }
                WrPtr: integer;         { where to put them in }
          
                        
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
        EtherBuff = array [0..PackBuffLen] of integer;
        pEtherBuff       Buffer: packed array[0..CirBufSize-1] of CirBufItem
                                        { last, the buffer }
       = ^EtherBuff;
{$endc}
        
        CirBufPtr = ^ CircularBuffer;
        CBType = (KDBType, RSIType, RSOType, StdType);{     end;

        TabBufPtr = ^TabletBuffer;
        TabletBuffer = packed record    { buffer used for tablet, clock and }
 128;         { # lines / display segment }
        CrsHeight = 64;        { Height of the cursor }
        CrsConst0 = #370;  types of circular bufs }
        CirBufItem = packed record      { what we put in circular buffers }
                ch: char     { constants to compute funny X position }
        VisOnly = #2000;       { mode bits - Visual screen only }
        VisAn;               { the character }
                case CBType of          { and device specific condition bits }
             dCur = #2400;     { visual screen and cursor }
        Map = #100000;         { cursor map function }
        
        
           KDBType: (KDBUnused: 0..63;
                              KDBOverrun: boolean;      { true = overrun }
                    CtrlC = chr(#3);
        CtrlS = chr(#23);
        CtrlQ = chr(#21);
        BlamCh = Chr(#303);      { untranslated shif              KDBError: boolean);       { OR of all error bits }
                    RSIType: (RSIUnused: 0..7;
              t-control-C }
        DumpCh = Chr(#304);      { untranslated shift-control-D }
        
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
        E3T                RSIBreak: boolean;        { true=break received }
                              RSIModem: boolean;        { tru / 	
ypeFile  will
display  the  default file name.  This is the same default file used
by the Editor, Linker, Run, etc.  Unlike  tchange his
                     password or enters a password for a new user.
                     Note that when you specify hese  programs,  however,
TypeFile does not change the default file name.
UserControl
UserControl - Maintain the list of usethe /PASS switch,
                     UserControl prompts for the password.  You can
                     enter any printing rs allowed on the Perq



UserControl is used to maintain the System.Users file which contains
information about valid usercharacter except blanks,
                     spaces, equal signs (=), commas (,), or
                     slashes (/).  The ms and  their  passwords,  group  identi-
fiers,  and  user  profiles.   This information is used by the Login
program (see aboaximum number of characters
                     is 31.  You can also respond to the password
                     prompt withve).  The System.Users file  must  be  in  the  root
directory  (top level) of the partition where the boot file is.  Its
comm CR.  This causes a null password
                     to be entered for the user.

                     If you omit the switnsole.  To display  multiple  files,
sequentially, separate the file specifications with a comma (,).

When  the  TypeFile  cand line takes the form:

          USERCONTROL [command][/switch(es)]

If you include a command, UserControl executes the command  finds a formfeed character (^^L) in the
file or when it gets to the bottom of the  screen,  it  waits  after
displayinommand and  then
exits  to  the  Shell.  If you do not include a command, UserControl
prompts with:

          UC>

and wag  a  screenful of text.  This permits the user to read the
page before the screen is erased and the next page is displayed.  Tits for input.

The following are valid commands:

          HELP

                     Provides online documentation.

o
continue,  type  ^^Q.   This  waiting  can  be  disabled by using the
/NOWAIT switch.  The /WAIT switch, which is the defaul
          ADDUSER [username][/switch(es)]

                     Adds a new user to the user file or, updates
              t, causes  the
waiting  to  happen.   The  final  switch  available is /HELP, which
displays online documentation.

The Type       the information for an existing user.  If
                     you omit a username, the command prompts for
           File command displays a solid, left pointing  triangle  when
it reaches the end of the file.

TypeFile  does  extension compl          one.

                     Any printing character except blanks, spaces,
                     equal signs (=), commetion on the file name specified.  If
the file to print is FOO.PAS, it is only necessary to type FOO.  The
extensions  that  tas (,), or slashes (/)
                     are valid usernames.  The maximum
                     number of characters is 31.ype knows about, in order tried, are: Pas, Micro,
Cmd, Dfs, and Doc.

If no filename is  supplied  on  the  command  line,  T  The command
                     accepts the following switches:

                     /PASS - permits an existing user to  0  	
     DispPtr = ^DisplayFile;
        DisplayFile = array[0..11] of
                packed record case boolean of
            
        TabIgnore = 2;          { number of points to ignore when finger is }
                                { picked up or p        true: (int: integer);
                    false:(LineCount: 0..127;
                           StartOver: boolean;
  ut down }
        TabFifoLen = TabAverage + TabIgnore;
        TabFifoMax = TabFifoLen - 1;
        GPIBxFudge = 38;        {                         ShowCursor: boolean;
                           VerticalRetrace: boolean;
                            actual range in X and Y for BitPad: 0..2200 }
        GPIByFudge = 1061;      { of TX and TY: 0..1100 }
                     ShowScreen: boolean;
                           DisableMicroInterrupt: boolean;
                           WriteBadParity: boo           { of TabAbsX: 0..1100 }
                                { of TabAbsY: 0..1100 }
                                { olean;
                           Map: (CursOnly, CCursOnly, Compl, ComplInv,
                                 Normal, Invert, f TabRelX: -38..1062   limited to 0..767 }
                                { of TabRelY: 1061..-39   limited to 1023..0 }
    CursComp, InvCursCompl))
                end;
        
        ScrCtlPtr = ^ ScrCtlBlock;
        ScrCtlBlock = packed recor    STopY = 0;
        SLeftX = 0;
        SRightX = 767;
        

Type
        DskCmds = (DskIdle, DskRdCheck, DskDiagRed
                Cmd: DispPtr;
                ScreenBase: Integer;
                CursorBase: Integer;
                Unad, DskWrCheck,
                   DskWrFirst, DskFormat, DskSeek, DskClear);
                   
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
  used1: Integer;
                Unused2: Integer;
                CursX: integer;
                filler: integer
                Ether3Cmds = (E3Rset, E3Status, E3Receive,
                      E3PromiscReceive, E3Transmit);
{$endc}

        FlpCm  end;
        
Const
        DskSPC = 30;            { Sectors Per Cynlinder }
        DskHds = 8;             { Max numberds = (FlpUnUsed, FlpRead, FlpWrite, FlpFormat, FlpSeek, FlpReset);
        
        GPIBCmds = (GPIBNop, GPIBWrite, GPIBWrEOI, of dsk heads }
        DskExHds = 0;           { Extra heads not in use }
        DskCyls = 202;          { Number of cylinde GPIBCntl);
        
                   { Types of block devices }
        IOCBType = (DskType, FlpType, SpkType, GPIBType,
rs }
        FlpUnits = 4;           { 0 is the only valid unit }
        FlpSPC = 26;            { numbered 1 to 26 }
      {$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
                                                         Ether3Type,
{$endc}
                    GenT                TabX: 0..#77777;        { Z80 Monitor Info }
                TabSwitch: boolean;
                TabY: 0..#777  FlpHds = 2;             { numbered 0 to 1 }
        FlpCyls = 77;           { numbered 0 to 77, 0 should not be used }
     77;
                Fill: 0..1;
                ClkTime: double;
                Z80Mon: Z80Readings
            end;

      
        TabAverage = 4;         { number of tablet points to average }
                                { this MUST be 4 } 0 	
.  For an existing
                     user, group id is unchanged if the switch
                     is omitted.

         to pointer    %Replay - Play back the most recent edit
%I - Insert before selection
%A - Append after selection         %Keys             /PROF=[profile] - specifies the complete path
                     for the user's profile file.

                  - special Keys during insertion
%S - Substitute for selection       %Accept - (Use INS) to do A,I,S,R,F
%D - Delete the sel      If you omit the switch for a new user, the
                     default is SYS:USER>name>PROFILE.  For an
              ected text       %Reject - (Use DEL) to abort A,I,S,R,F,G
%F - Find a string in file
%R - Replace occurrences of string  %Poin       existing user, the profile is unchanged if
                     you omit the switch.


          CHECKUSER [username]ter - to select text
%V - Set Verify mode for R          %Scroll  - see adjacent view          
%* - Select entire file       


                     Validates a username and password.  If you omit
                     the username, the command promp      %Thumb   - see remote views
%< > - Set direction for F,R,G,L,W
%digits - Set repetition count      %INS - Repeat last A,ts for one.


          NEWFILE

                     Destroys the existing System.Users file and
                     creI,S,R,D,F,G

$KeyCommands - Index of keyboard commands for selecting text           
REPLAY


     Transcript/Replay
   ates a new System.Users file.


          LISTUSERS

                     Displays a list of all of the valid users.


   -----------------
     

     The Editor writes a transcript file during every edit  session.
The  transcript  is  a  file         REMOVEUSER [username]

                     Delete a user from the file.  If you omit the
                     usern  which  contains a description of every
keystroke and puck or pen press performed during  an  edit  session.
This  transcriptch for a new user, the
                     password defaults to null.  For an existing
                     user, the passworame, the command prompts for one.


          QUIT

                     Exits the program.

You  can also specify the /Hd is unchanged if the switch

                     /GROUP=[group id] - permits an existing user
                     to changELP switch (type /HELP or press the HELP
key) with any command or  in  response  to  any  prompt  to  display
specific help ine the group id or enters a group id
                     for a new user.  The value for group id can
                     be aformation.
                                                                                                                    ny integer from 0 to 255
                     inclusive.  If you do not specify a group id,
                     you are prompEditor V2.0 Help                                        Copyright (C)1981, 3RCC

%Q - Quit (leave the editor)        %HELP - Hted for a value.

                     If you omit the switch for a new user, the
                     group id defaults to 1ow to use this Help information
                                    %Introduction - general instructions
%E - Extend selection 1  	
ro: boolean;
                        DskWriteFault: boolean;
                        DskSeekComplete: boolean;
               Ether3Delay: integer;
                        Ether3WdCnt: integer;
                        Ether3Status: integer;
         ype);


        IOCBPtr = ^IOCB;
        IOCB = packed record { IOCBs must be 8 word aligned }
                Buffer: IOBu          DskDriveRead: boolean;
                        DskNextIOCB: IOCBPtr);
                    FlpType:
                fPtr; { data buffer for transaction }
                case IOCBType of
                    DskType:
                      ( D      ( FlpUnit: 0..FlpUnits-1;
                        FlpHead: 0..FlpHds-1;
                        FlpFill1: 0..31;
      skCommand: 0..255;
                        DskNumSect: 0..255;
                       (* NEW FS [*)
                        D                  FlpCylinder: 0..255 { 0..FlpCyls-1 };
                        FlpSector: 0..255 { 1..FlpSPC };
             skAddr: Integer;
                       (* NEW FS *)
                       (* OLD FS [)
                        DskSector: 0           FlpCommand: 0..255 { FlpCmds };
                        FlpByteCnt: integer { 0..256 };
                        Flp..DskSPC-1;
                        DskHead: 0..DskHds+DskExHds-1;
                        DskCylinder: 0..DskCyls-1;
       Fill2: array [4..11] of integer;
                        FlpResult: integer;     { Not yet defined }
                        F                (* OLD FS *)
                        DskSerialNum: double;
                        DskLogBlk: integer;
      lpNextIOCB: IOCBPtr);
                    SpkType:
                      ( SpkFill0: 0..255;
                        SpkNumBu                  DskFill1: integer;
                        DskNextAdr: double;
                        DskPrevAdr: double;
fs: 0..255;
                        SpkFill1: array[3..11] of integer;
                        SpkFill2: 0..16383;
                                  DskCntlError: ( OK,
                                        AddrsErr,       { address error }
                      SpkAddrErr: boolean;
                        SpkError: boolean;
                        SpkNextIOCB: IOCBPtr);
                                PHCRC,          { Physical Header CRC }
                                        LHSer,                             GPIBType: 
                       (GPIBCommand: GPIBCmds;
                        GPIBF0: 0..63;
         { Logical Serial Wrong }
                                        LHLB,           { Logical Block Wrong }
                                    GPIBNumBufs: 0..255;
                        GPIBByteCount: 0..255;
                        GPIBF1: array [4..                    LHCRC,          { Logical Header CRC }
                                        DaCRC,          { Data CRC }11] of integer;
                        GPIBResult: integer; {Not Implemented}
                        GPIBNextIOCB: IOCBPtr);
                                        Busy);
                        DskFill2: boolean;
                        DskTrackZe
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
                    Ether3Type:
                      ( Ether3Cmd: integer;
                        1 	
r saves keystrokes and presses and writes them to  the
transcript file whenever:

     1) A carriage-return is typed in Inserl you are done,
     then either Accept or Reject  the  insertion.   If  you  Accept
     immediately  after  typing  "A",  tht mode.
     2) A command which changes the text is successfully completed.
     3) The transcript buffer is filled.

     Ie most recently inserted or
     deleted text is inserted.  If you Accept,  the  text  you  have
     just typed is displayed f  an  old  transcript  file exists, it is destroyed the first
time the buffer is flushed.  This means that you  can  re-enter at the top of the screen inside of

          I{   ...   }   .
D
D - Delete  the  selected text.  If you delete text, it is the
Editor  without destroying the old transcript file as long as you do
not do something that causes the buffer to be flushe displayed
     at the top of the screen inside of

          D{   ...   }   .

     The character which immediately followd.  Keep in mind
that  presses count against the 256-word buffer.  If you do not want
to destroy the old transcript file, do ns  the  deleted  text  is
     selected.
E
E  - Extend the selection 
     Once you have selected
     some text, you can ot type any commands, do not
press  more  than  a  few  times,  and  exit  the  Editor  by typing
control-shift-C.

     To extend the selection  by  moving  the  pen  to
     another  piece  of  text  and  then typing "E".  The selection is
     extreplay  a  transcript,  type  "Editor/Replay".   The  Editor
replays  the  previous  edit session and stops just before the firended to a character, word, or line boundary, depending on the
     type  of your last selection.  Commands that change the selst
command.  You can control the replay by typing one of the  following
keys:

     SPACE   stop replaying after the next chection
     (other than Extend) set the type  to  character.   Unfortunately,
     you  can  make  the  selection larger with aracter or puck press.
     CR      stop  replaying after a carriage return in I command or
             after next command ifExtend, but you cannot
     make it smaller.  In order to make  the  selection  smaller,  you
     must  start  over  by selec not in I command.
     LF      stop replaying after next command.
     INS     begin replaying and stop when one of the aboveting a character, word, or line.
F
F - Find  a  character  string  starting  at  the  beginning  of the
     selected text.  keys  is
             typed.
     DEL     exit replay mode.

     If  no  DEL  key  is typed, the Editor automatically exit When you type  "F",  the  top  line  shows  the
     prompt

          Find: enter target string

     Type  the  string    is  written to the file ">Editor.Transcript".  The
transcript may be replayed later.  This feature is intended for  use
whens from
replay mode when the end of the transcript  is  reached.   Once  you
have  exited  replay  mode  you  can  begin editin the Editor or the PERQ crashes during an edit session or if you
make some disasterous error with the Editor.

     The Editog normally, but we
suggest that you Quit-Update as soon as possible.
A
A - Append  text after the selection.  Type text unti 2  	
ointX, PointY: integer;        { the point of the cursor }
        TabFifo: array[0..TabFifoMax] of
                  record Xs] of
                        record                 { NO Fake Units Included Here! }
                            SSN: integer,Y: integer end;  { fifo of tablet points }
        TabFifoInx: integer;            { index into tablet fifo }
        TabCoun;
                            GPtr: integer;
                            Rtn: 0..255;
                            SLink: intet: integer;              { counter for ignoring tablet points }
        SumX, SumY: integer;            { sum of 4 points for ager
                        end;

Var
        IntTab: IntTabPtr;              { pointer to interrupt vector table }
       veraging }
        FlpLastCylinder: integer;       { last cylinder referenced }
        FlpLastHead: integer;           { last IOPriv1Unused: boolean;         { ***** Unused ***** }
        IOPriv2Unused: boolean;         { ***** Unused ***** }
                      Ether3NextIOCB: IOCBPtr );
{$endc}
                    GenType:    { General Purpose entry }
                  head referenced }
        GPIBTabletState: integer;       { GPIB tablet current state }
        GPIBxTablet, GPIByTablet: int     ( GenCmd: 0..255;
                        NumBlks: 0..255;
                        GenFill0: array[3..11] of integer;
  eger;  { GPIB tablet coordinates }
        GPIBInBuf: CirBufPtr;           { GPIB input buffer }
        StanleyTablet: boolea                      Result: integer;
                        NextIOCB: IOCBPtr)
            end { IOCB };
                n;         { if Stanley tablet is enabled }
        CurDskHds: integer;             { number of heads on this disk.  4 or 8}
 
Var
        KRBuf,                          { Keyboard Raw Buffer }
        KTBuf,                          { Keyboard transl       CursF: integer;                 { function currently in use}
        BotCursF: integer;              { function for areaated buffer }
        RSIBuf,                         { RS-232 In Buffer }
        RSOBuf: CirBufPtr;              { RS-232 Ou below used area}
        BotComplemented: boolean;       { whether bot is complemented or not}
        SBottomY: integer;    t Buffer }
        TabBuf: TabBufPtr;              { Tablet/Clock Buffer }
        ScrBuf: ScrCtlPtr;              { Screen co          { bottom of displayed area }
        TabMode: TabletMode;            { Current mode of the tablet }
        CCursModntrol blocks }
        DisFile0,DisFile1: DispPtr;     { Screen Display lists - double bufrs }
        OldCurY,               e: CursMode;            { Current mode of cursor }
        newFunct: Boolean;              { Tells when have a new function to         { previous Cursor Y position }
        OldCurX: integer;               { previous Cursor X position MOD 8 }
        C
                                          insure that cursor redisplayed }        
        CB : IOCBPtr;                   { Pursor: CurPatPtr;              { Cursor Pattern }
        CursorX, CursorY: integer;      { new cursor coordinates }
        Pointer to IOCB used by UnitIO }



Type
        IntTabPtr = ^IntVecTable;
        IntVecTable = array [0..MaxUnit-FakeUnit 2 	
o return to the Editor

          :

     Type  one  of  these letters followed by RETURN.  The RETURN is
     required so replace occurrences of the target string.  If
     you Accept before typing  any  characters  of  the  replacement
     stringyou  want  to  search for and then Accept or
     Reject.  Rejecting aborts the  Find  command.   If  you  Accept
     immediathat you get a chance to change  your  mind  before
     it's too late.

     If  you  update  or  write  to  a file that alrtely  after  typing  "F",  the previous target string is
     used.  Lower case letters in the target  string will  match any eady exists, the
     Editor saves the old version of the file by adding a "$" to the
     end  of  its name.  This allows you
     letter in the text, but upper case letters in the target string 
     will only match upper case letters in the text.   I to get the old version back
     if you decide you made a mistake.   You  can  safely  edit  the
     backup  file since it hf the target
     string  is found, it becomes the  selected text.  Note that the 
     target string is shown at the top of tas a different name than the new version
     of the file.

     While it is never a good idea to type control-C while you'rehe screen inside of

          F{   ...   }   .

     A Find command can be done in the reverse direction (toward the
      in
     the  Editor, you should not type it while the Editor is writing
     the new copy of your file.  You will lose the  nbeginning  of the file).  See the section  "Reverse Direction".   
     You  can ask  the  Editor to search for a specified  nuew  version  of
     your  file, and the old version will be in the backup file.  If
     you type control-C before writing thmber  of
     occurrences  of the target  string  by  preceding  the  command
     with a number.  See the section "Repeat Coue new file or type  "E"  to
     exit  without updating, your file will remain unchanged regard-
     less of any changes you nt".
I
I - Insert text before the selection.  Type text until you are done,
     then  either  Accept  or  Reject  the insermade with the Editor.
R
R - Replace occurrences of a character string with another character
     string inside the selectedtion.  If you Accept
     immediately after typing "I", the  most  recently  inserted  or
     deleted  text  is  inserted.    text.  Typing "R" causes the prompt

           Replace: enter target string

     at  the top of the screen.  Type in a stIf you Accept, the text you have
     just typed is displayed at the top of the screen inside of

          I{   ...   }   .ring and then Accept or
     Reject.  Note that the target string is displayed inside of

          F{   ...   }

     just
Q
Q - Quit from the Editor.  When you type "Q", the screen is  erased,
     and a list of options is presented.

          as though you were using the the Find  command.   Capital-
     ization is ignored.  If you Accept, the prompt

          Re U   to update <your file name>
          W   to write to another file
          E   to exit without updating
          R   tplace: enter replacement string

     is shown at the top of the screen.  Now you can type in the new
     string which will  3  	
re Z80Intr;      { Z80 monitor }

  Procedure KeyIntr;      { keyboard }

  Procedure RSIIntr;      { RS232 in }

  Proced                              (especially GPIB and RS232)
{
   4-Nov-81  DAS  V6.0  Fixed to work with 10 megabuad ethernet.
ure RSOIntr;      { RS232 out }

  Procedure PutIntr;      { PutStatus completion }

  Procedure GetIntr;      { GetStatus c
   1-Jul-81  BAM  V5.4  Change Screen name to ScreenOut.

   3-Jun-81  JPS  V5.3  Add Virgil headers and comments.

  23-Mompletion }

{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
  Procedure Ether3Intr;   { 3 MBaud EtherNet completion }
  Function E3Reset: integer;ay-81  JPS  V5.2  Use new IOKeyDisable/IOKeyEnable in place of old
                        DisCtlC/EnaCtlC.
  
  16-Apr-81  G
  Procedure E3RecStart;
{$endc}


{*******************************}   Private   {*****************************}
          GR  V5.1  Add 3MHz Ethernet Drivers (JEB).
  
  11-May-81  JPS  V5.0  Split IO into several modules.
  
   6-May-81  JPS  V4 .7  1. Use new form of the SetCylinder StartIO.
                        2. Don't bother doing 10 trys in FindSize since only
                            the last result was believed regardless of success
                           or failure.
          Module IO_Unit;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ IO_Unit - Unit IO routines              3. Hang if we cannot figure out the size of the disk.
  
  11-Apr-81  JPS  V4.6  Changes for virtual memory.
   KeyEnable: boolean;             { if keyboard interrupts are enabled }


{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
Var     etherCB: IOCBPtr; .
{ Miles A. Barel  ca. 1 Jan 80.
{ Copyright (C) 1980, Three Rivers Computer Corporation
{
{ Abstract:
{       IO_Unit exp              { Pointer to IOCB used by Ethernet }
        pEBuff: IOBufPtr;               { Pointer to Ethernet IO buffer }
 orts procedures to perform IO on the various IO Units
{       (devices).
{
{ Design:
{       1) UnitIO must increment and de       
        E3Restart,                      { Ether3 state }
        E3IsPromiscuous,
        E3InProgress,
        E3Iscrement the IOCount of the segments
{          which are involved in IO.
{       2) Segment faults must *never* happen while iReceiving: boolean;
        E3RecErrs: integer;
{$endc}



  { interrupt routines: }
  
  Procedure DiskIntr;     { hardnterrupts are off.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------- disk }

  Procedure FloppyIntr;   { floppy disk }

  Procedure SpeechIntr;   { speech out }

  Procedure GPIBOutIntr;  { ---------------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ 29 Jan 82  WJHansen V6.2  made time out 300000
{GPIB out }

  Procedure GPIBInIntr;   { GPIB in }

  Procedure TabIntr;      { tablet (actually video retrace }

  Procedu
{ 10 Dec 81  WJHansen V6.1  removed Arith; use long for Time
{                           add timeout for all other devices
{ 3 	
  and the text you have just deleted is displayed at the  top  of
     the screen inside of

          D{   ...   }   .

  he  replace
     command with DEL.
          Verify mode is turned off after execution of most commands
     including the Re   After  substituting,  the  character  immediately following the
     deleted text is selected.  Be careful with this commandplace command.
*
* - Select the entire file from beginning to end.
Accept
Accept and Reject

Many Editor commands requir.  It is
     easy  to  confuse  Substitute with Replace.  There is no way to
     "undo" a Substitute command because you  cae that the change be  Accepted or Rejected.
Acceptance is signalled by typing the INS key.  Rejection is signalled 
by typing nnot  re-insert  the
     deleted  text.   Attempting  to  re-insert  the  most  recently
     inserted or deleted text will mthe DEL key; in this case the change is not made.
Reject
Accept and Reject

Many Editor commands require that the change be,  the  previous  replacement string is used.  This means
     that to replace with nothing, you must first type  a  charactererely  re-insert  the  text  you
     just  typed  in.  The deleted text is gone forever.  This means
     that if you type "S
     and  then delete it with the BACK SPACE key.  In the absence of
     a repeat  count,  all  occurrences  within  the  sel" when  you  means  to  type  "R",  you  may
     accidentally  delete  a  large portion of your file and have no
     way of ection  are
     replaced.   If  a  repeat count is typed immediately before the
     "R", a specified number of occurrences agetting it back.
V
V - Toggle Verify mode.  When you type "V", Verify mode is turned on
     or  off,  depending  on  whethere  replaced,  starting
     at  the  beginning  of  the selection.  See the section "Repeat
     Count for Find and Replace".r it was off or on before.  When
     Verify mode is on, a "V" is displayed in the upper,  right-hand
     corner of the scree  The direction can be  changed  in
     the  same  way  as  for  the  Find  command.   See  the section
     "Direction of Fin.  In Verify mode the Replace command gives
     you the option of replacing, not replacing, or aborting at each
     occurrend and Replace".
S
S - Substitute new text for the  selected  text.   This  command  is
     similar  to the sequence "Insernce of the target string.  The prompt

          Replace: INS replaces, <space> doesn't, DEL aborts

     is  displayed  fort, Delete".  Type text until you
     are done, then either Accept or Reject the insertion.   If  you
     Accept immediately   each  occurrence of the target string.  The
     target string is indicated by a double  underline  and  by  the
     cursorafter typing "S", the most recently inserted
     or deleted text is inserted.  If you Accept, the text you  have
     just  t  arrow (if you keep the pen away from the tablet).  This
     double underline is difficult to see, but it's there.  You  mayyped  is  displayed at the top of the screen as the most
     recently inserted text inside of

          I{   ...   }

   
     now  Accept  the  replacement  with INS, you may skip over this
     occurrence by  typing  the  space-bar,  or  abort  t 4  	
 numbers (reinstating changes made in V4.0).

  25-Feb-81  GGR  V4.2  Added setting/reading of DskFill1 in UnitIO.
            { highest legal device code }
        FakeUnits = 2;          { Number of units which don't have StartIO's }
        IOStart              Moved new/dispose of CB from UnitIO to IO.Init.

  16-Feb-81  BAM  V4.1  Put back in conversions on Disk Physica = 0;            { Master Z-80 control }
        HardDisk = 1;
{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
        Ether3 = 2;
{$elsec}
{$ifc El block
                        numbers; fixed botCursF bug.  Del XXX procedures;
                        Changed to use new sther10MBaud then}
        Ether10 = 2;
{$endc}
{$endc}

        Floppy = 3;
        Speech = 4;
        GPIBIn = 11;
   creen
  
   9-Feb-81  BAM  V4.0  No longer does conversions on Disk Physical block
                        numbers; fixed Cur     GPIBOut = 5;
        Z80Monitor = 6;
        Tablet = 7;
        KeyBoard = 8;
        RS232In = 9;
        RS232Out =sorUpdate to allow partial screen
                        display and added procedure IOScreenSize to set a 
                  10;
        SpPutSts = 12;          { Put/Get Status }
        SpGetSts = 13;
        SpPutCir = 14;          { Put/Get from       new size.
  
  13-Jan-81  JPS  V3.3  Move creation of the IOSeg to memory manager init.
                        Move $ Circular Buffer }
        SpGetCir = 15;
        { Fake Units Begin Here }
        TransKey = 16;          { Translated KeybR- to private part.

  20-Nov-80  JPS  V3.2  Initialize TabFifoInx in InitTablet.
  
  17-Nov-80  JPS  V3.1  Export the inteoard }
        ScreenOut = 17;         { Screen Display }
        Clock = 18;             { Used only for Put/Get Status }
  rrupt table.
                        Check SystemInitialized for control-C abort.
  
  16-Nov-80  BAM  V3.0  Radically change      LastUnit = Clock;       { for unit validity checking }

Type
        IOBufPtr = ^IOBuffer;
        IOBuffer = array[0.d Cursor and Tablet interface.  New
                        time procedures.  Split into another include file.
  
  10-Oct-80.0] of integer;
        
        CBufPtr = ^CBufr;
        CBufr = packed array[0..0] of char;     { same as Memory, except f  JPS  V2.2  Added support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
 
  27-Sep-80  DAS  V2.1  Added timeout code to UnitIO for the
 or }
                                                { character buffers }
        BigStr = String[255];                   { A
  19-Mar-81  BAM  V4.5  Changed name of included modules to IO_Init and IO_Proc
  
   3-Mar-81  JPS  V4.4  1) Fix LocateDskH                       hard disk.
 

  19-Sep-80  DAS  V2.0  Added code for 24 MByte disks.
  
{---------------------------eads and FindSize to agree with V4.3.
                        2) Teach the HardDisk timeout code about multi-sector
          --------------------------------------------------}

{*******************************}   Exports   {*************************                 operations.

  28-Feb-81  JPS  V4.3  No longer do conversions on Disk Physical block
                       ****}



Imports SystemDefs from SystemDefs;


Const
        { Device Code Assignments }
        MaxUnit = 18;          4 	
onyms.   
     The current direction is displayed  as an arrow in the upper left
corner of the screen.
INS
INS -  Repeat th Bar
     --------------

     The  area  to  the  left  of the left-margin line is called the
"scroll bar".  If you move the last command.  Typing the INS key at command level
     repeats  the  last  command.   Only  certain  commands  may  be
    e pointer into  this  bar,  it  changes
into an up-pointing arrow at the left side and a down-pointing arrow
at the right side repeated  this  way,  since  it is kind of silly to repeat some
     commands (e.g.  "*", "E").  The "A", "D", "F",  "I",  "R".  If you press down on the pen when the  arrow  is
pointing up, the line that the pointer is next to is scrolled to the
top o,  and
     "S" commands may be repeated this way.
HELP
HELP - Get explanations

     Type the HELP key (or DEL HELP if nef the screen.  If you press when the arrow  is  pointing  down,
the  top  line  of  the screen is scrolled down to the line thacessary) to get to this set 
     of explanations.  Each time the help subsystem prompts, you can 
     type one of the lettert the
pointer is next to.  Thus if you put the pointer near the top of the
screen,  by  pressing  repeatedly, you can scroll ss or words that appears before  a dash in 
     the  index  above.  You need  not type more of the name than is
     needed tolowly through the
file.  If you put the pointer near the bottom of the screen, you can
move  through  the  file  in  large  ju distinguish it from all other names.
     
     To exit this Help, just press the RETURN key.
     
     For a general intrmps of pages.  If you put the
pointer near the middle of the screen, you can move through the file
in half-page jumps.
Thumb  Accepted or Rejected.
Acceptance is signalled by typing the INS key.  Rejection is signalled 
by typing the DEL key; in thisoduction to the editor, type the word
     
         introduction
         
     followed by a RETURN.
digits
     Repeat case the change is not made.
<
<  >  - Reverse direction.  These keys control the  Reverse  Direction
flag.  The Reverse Di Count
     ------------

     Typing a 1- to 4-digit number before  pressing a command  tells
how many times it is to be dorection flag causes most commands to work  toward
the front of the file instead of the end.  Commands affected are C, W,
L, F,ne.  For  Find and  Replace, the number
specifies  the  number  of occurrences of the target string that you
want to find or r G.  The flag is turned off by all other commands except M, E, V,
N.  It is also turned off by F, but the old direction is remeeplace.  This  number  is  displayed  in  the  top,
right-hand  corner  of the screen after the letter "R" (which stands
for "mbered if
the F is repeated with INS.
     Typing  a  ">" sets the forward direction  (toward the end of the
file) for  Find repeat count").  The number of occurrences  actually  found  or
replaced  is  displayed  in the same corner following the letteand Replace commands.   "." and "+" are  synonyms  for
this  command.   "<" sets the reverse direction;  "," and "-" are syn-
r "C"
(which stands for "count").  This number increments as the  Find  or
Replace command executes.
Scroll
     The Scroll 5  	
 big String }
        
        UnitRng = 0..MaxUnit;
        
        IOStatPtr = ^IOStatus;
        IOStatus = record
   code for GetStatus }
                Name: packed array[0..3] of char
            end;

Const           { RS-232 Speeds }
              HardStatus: integer;            { hardware status return }
                SoftStatus: integer;            { devic       RS9600 = 1;
        RS4800 = 2;
        RS2400 = 4;
        RS1200 = 8;
        RS600 = 16;
        RS300 = 32;
   e independent status }
                BytesTransfered: integer
            end;
            
        IOHeadPtr = ^IOHeader;     RS150 = 64;
        RS110 = 87;
        
Type
        Z80Readings = packed record       { Z80 Voltage/Temp Monitor Read
        IOHeader = record                       { Hard disk header record }
                       SerialNum: Double;       {ings }
                Ground: integer;
                Volts5: integer;
                Volts12: integer;
                M Serial number of the file }
                       LogBlock: integer;       { The logical block number }
                    inus12: integer;
                VRef: integer;
                Net: integer;
                CRTemp: integer;
                Filler: integer;
                       NextAdr: Double;         { Address of next block in the file} 
                       BaseTemp: integer;
                Volts55: integer;
                Volts24: integer
            end;
            
       PrevAdr: Double          { Address of previous block }
                     end;

        DevTabPtr = ^DeviceTable;
         Z80Settings = packed record     { Z80 Voltage/Temp Monitor Settings }
                MinGround: integer;
                   DeviceTable = array [UnitRng] of packed record
                CtlPtr: IOBufPtr;               { actually pointer to ChrCntlMaxGround: integer;
                Min5: integer;
                Max5: integer;
                Min12: integer;
          Blk or IOCB, }
                                                { but we'll coerce later }
                BlockSize: integer;       Max12: integer;
                MinMinus12: integer;
                MaxMinus12: integer;
                MinVRef: inte            { 0 = variable size }
                                                { 1 = character device (uses circ buf) }
   ger;
                MaxVRef: integer;
                MinNet: integer;
                MaxNet: integer;
                Min                                             { >1 = fixed blocksize (= blocksize ) }
                IntrMask: integer;        CRTemp: integer;
                MaxCRTemp: integer;
                MinBaseTemp: integer;
                MaxBaseTemp: integ      { interrupt mask bits }
                IntrPriority: integer;          { decoded iterrupt priority (0..14) }
          er;
                Min55: integer;
                Max55: integer;
                Min24: integer;
                Max24: i      PSCode: 0..255;                 { Special code for PutStatus }
                GSCode: 0..255;                 { Special nteger
            end;
        
        

        DevStatusBlock = packed record
                ByteCnt: integer;        5 	



     ^K - Represents the end of the file.

     S - Represents  the  position  of  the  beginning  of  the
         selentrol-"             -none-

     Since these special keys are pre-defined, in  order  to  insert
them  into  your  file  you ction.

     ( - Represents  the  position  of  the  beginning  of  the
         displayed text.

     ) - Represents  the  must  type  control-" (the Editor quote
character) followed by the special key.  When  you  type  control-",
the  insert curs position  of the end of the displayed
         text.

     The thumb bar is used to rapidly move around in your file,  but
or changes from "_" to "^@" to indicate you typed the
quote character.
Pointer
Pointer
     The PERQ text Editor is a "poinit  is  not very precise.  When you put the pointer on the thumb bar
and press down, the portion of the file represented by that, act" Editor.  This means that
to  perform  an editing action, you first "point" to a piece of text
in the file and then pert  portion
of  the  bar is displayed on the screen.  When you press at the left
end of the bar the beginning of the file is shform some action on it.   Pointing  is  done
with  the  tablet.   Your  PERQ  probably has a Summagraphics BitPad
tablet.  Wheown,  when  you  press
the "^K" the end of the file is shown, and when you press the "S" the
beginning of the selection is shon you move the pen on the tablet, the  pointer  (cursor)
moves  to  follow  the  pen.  The pointer changes shape depending on
wn.

     The thumb bar can also be used to extend the  selection.   When
you  type  "E"  while in the thumb bar, the selectiwhere it is on the screen.  It may be a up-and-left pointing  arrow,
an  up-pointing  arrow,  a  down-pointing arrow, or a circon is extended to
the position in the file which is  represented  by  that  particular
portion of the thumb bar.  This is usuale.  These
different shapes indicate that different things will happen when you
press down.

      Pointing  at  text  (alsolly only useful for extending
to the beginning or end of the file.
Keys
     Special Characters
     ------------------

  called  selecting  text) is done by
pressing the  pen  down  on  the  tablet  when  the  pointer  is  an
up-and-left-pointinAction            Character             Alternate
------            ---------             ---------

End-of-line       RETURNg arrow.  If you move the pointer until it points
at some character and then press down, the character  is  "selected"
by  und
     The Thumb Bar
     -------------

     The  top-margin  line is called the "thumb bar".  When you move
the pointer to                control-M,control-J
                                        -or-  control-M,LF

Erase character   BACK SPACE  this line, it changes into a circle.   Think  of  the
thumb  bar as a linear representation of your file.  The left end of
th           control-H

Erase word        control-BACK SPACE    control-W

Erase line        control-OOPS          control-U
e bar represents the beginning of your file.   Special  characters
are used to represent other interesting parts of your file.
Accept            INS                   control-Y

Reject            DEL                   control-N

Quote             co 6  	
                           PutLimits: Z80Settings
                                         ));
                    Floppy: (ca     0..255;
                                    FlpSectorByte:     0..255;
                                    FlpSizeSectorBse integer of { Get or Put }
                              1: (           { Get Status }
                                  Flpyte: 0..255
                                   );
                                  2 {IOSeek}:
                             Unit: 0..3;
                                  FlpHead: 0..1;
                                  FlpNotReady: boolean;
              (FlpPresentCylinder: 0..255
                                   )
                                  );
                 { # of status bytes }
                case UnitRng of
                    KeyBoard,
                    Tablet,
{$ifc Ether3                          FlpEquipChk: boolean;
                                  FlpSeekEnd: boolean;
                       MBaud then}
                    Ether3,
{$endc}
                    Clock: (DevEnable: boolean);
                    
                FlpIntrCode: 0..3;
                                 case integer of
                                  1 {IORead, IO               RS232In,
                    RS232Out: (RSRcvEnable: boolean;
                               RSFill: 0..127;
 Write, IOFormat}:
                                   (FlpMissAddr: boolean; { in data or header }
                                                          RSSpeed: 0..255;
                               RSParity: (NoParity, OddParity, IllegParity,
           FlpNotWritable: boolean;
                                    FlpNoData: boolean;
                                    F                                       EvenParity);
                               RSStopBits: (Syncr,Stop1,Stop1x5,Stop2);
  lpFill1: 0..1;
                                    FlpOverrun: boolean;
                                    FlpDataError: bool                             RSXmitBits: (Send5,Send7,Send6,Send8);
                               RSRcvBits: (Rcv5,Rcv7,Rcv6,Rean; { in data or header }
                                    FlpFill2: 0..1;
                                    FlpEndCylincv8));
                    Z80Monitor: (Z80Enable: boolean;
                                 Z80Fill: 0..32767;
             der: boolean;
                                    FlpDataMissAddr: boolean; { in data }
                                    Fl                    case boolean of { Get or Put; true = Get }
                                   true: (       { Get Status }pBadCylinder: boolean;
                                    FlpFill3: 0..3;
                                    FlpWrongCylinde
                                          GetRead: Z80Readings;
                                          GetLimits: Z80Settinr: boolean;
                                    FlpDataDataError: boolean; { in data }
                                    Flpgs
                                         );
                                   false:(      { Put Status }
               Fill4: 0..3;
                                    FlpCylinderByte:   0..255;
                                    FlpHeadByte:   6 	
erlining it.  If you press twice in the same place, a word is
selected by underlining the entire word.  If you press three  timng  text) is done by
pressing the  pen  down  on  the  tablet  when  the  pointer  is  an
up-and-left-pointing arrow.  If you es,
the  entire  line  is  selected.   You  cannot  move the pen between
presses if you want to select a word or line.  Anothemove the pointer until it points
at some character and then press down, the character  is  "selected"
by  underlining it.  If r way to select
an  entire  line  is to move the pointer until it points at the left
margin line.  One press here selects the you press twice in the same place, a word is
selected by underlining the entire word.  If you press three  times,
the  entire entire line.
Introduction
     Introduction
     ------------

     It  is  probably  a good idea to sit down at a PERQ an line  is  selected.   You  cannot  move the pen between
presses if you want to select a word or line.  Another way to select
d try out
the Editor as you are reading.  A good file to  edit  when  you  are
first trying out the Editor is the Editor's helan  entire  line  is to move the pointer until it points at the left
margin line.  One press here selects the entire line.

 p file.  This way you
can read the help file while you are editing.  You should copy it to
a  scratch  file  so that you won't    Once you have selected some text, you can extend the  selection
by moving the pen to another piece of text and then typing  have to worry about accidentally
changing it.  Do this with the system "Copy" command:

     Copy EditorK.Paras Scratch.File"E".  The
selection is extended  to  a  character,  word,  or  line  boundary,
depending  on the type of your last selection. 

Now ask the Editor to edit this new file:

     Edit Scratch.File

     The PERQ text Editor is a "point, act" Editor.   Commands that change
the selection  (other  than  Extend)  set  the  type  to  character.
Unfortunately,  you  can  make the This means that
to  perform  an editing action, you first "point" to a piece of text
in the file and then perform some action selection larger with Extend, but
you cannot make it smaller.  In order to make the selection smaller,
you must start over by on it.   Pointing  is  done
with  the  tablet.   Your  PERQ  probably has a Summagraphics BitPad
tablet.  When you move the peselecting a character, word, or line with the
tablet.

     After selecting text, you can perform some action on  it.   You
n on the tablet, the  pointer  (cursor)
moves  to  follow  the  pen.  The pointer changes shape depending on
where it is on thcan  insert  before  or after the selected text, delete the selected
text, search for a character string starting at the beginne screen.  It may be a up-and-left pointing  arrow,
an  up-pointing  arrow,  a  down-pointing arrow, or a circle.  These
diffeing of the
selection,  or any of the other Editor actions.  The top line of the
screen shows the command prompt, error messagerent shapes indicate that different things will happen when you
press down.

      Pointing  at  text  (also  called  selectis, and prompts  within
commands.

     Many Editor commands require termination by either Accepting or
Rejecting the action. 7  	
 (IOReset, IORead, IOWrite, IOSeek, IOFormat,
                  IODiagRead, IOWriteFirst, IOIdle, IOWriteEOI, IOConfigure);

 not complete }
Procedure IOPutStatus(Unit: UnitRng; var StatBlk: DevStatusBlock);
                                           
Var
        DevTab: DevTabPtr;              { pointer to system device table }
        CtrlSPending: boolean;          { if  { Set status on device Unit }
Procedure IOGetStatus(Unit: UnitRng; var StatBlk: DevStatusBlock);
                            ^S has halted screen output }
        IOInProgress: boolean;          { false when speech is active }
        IO24MByte: boole                { Reads status on device Unit }
Procedure IOBeep;                           { You guessed it, BEEP! }


{$ifan;             { true if the disk is 24 MBytes }
        


Function IOCRead(Unit: UnitRng; var Ch: char): integer;
      c Ether3MBaud then}
Function Ether3Transmit(Buff: IOBufPtr; WdCnt: integer) : integer;

Function Ether3Receive(Buff: IOBufPtr                                      { read a character from a }
                                            { character devic; var WdCnt: integer; timeout: integer)
                      : integer;

Function Ether3Start(Promiscuous, Restart: boolean)e and return }
                                            { status: IOB no char available }
                                  : integer;
{$endc}


        


{*******************************}   Private   {*****************************}
                      2: (           { Put Status }
                                  FlpDensity: 0..255; { single = 0,
                          {         IOC character returned }
Function IOCWrite(Unit: UnitRng; Ch: char): integer;
                                                                    double = #100 }
                                  FlpHeads: 0..255;   { 1 or 2 heads }                 { write Ch to character device }
                                            { and return status:           }
                                  FlpEnable: boolean
                                 );
                              3: ( 
                                            {       IOB buffer full        }
                                            {              { Byte access }
                                  FlpByte1: 0..255;
                                  FlpByte2: 0..2   IOC character sent     }

                  
Procedure UnitIO(Unit: UnitRng;                 { IO to block structured }
 55;
                                  FlpByte3: 0..255;
                                  FlpByte4: 0..255;
                                 Bufr: IOBufPtr;                { devices }
                 Command: IOCommands;
                 ByteCnt: int                 FlpByte5: 0..255;
                                  FlpByte6: 0..255;
                                  FlpByeger;
                 LogAdr: double;
                 HdPtr: IOHeadPtr;
                 StsPtr: IOStatPtr);

Procedure Ite7: 0..255
                                 )
                            )
                end;


Type
    IOCommands =OWait(var Stats: IOStatus);          { hang until I/O completes }
Function IOBusy(var Stats: IOStatus): boolean;  { true if I/O 7 	
rd select                    %N  - Note current view
%L - Line select                    %X  - Keyboard Thumb Bar
%G - Go to aeither  letters or
     non-letters; Shift-W chooses words delimited by blank-space.)
KeyCommands>L
L  - Change the current  character              %LF - Keyboard Scroll
%M - Turn More mode on/off          %T  - Top (redisplay selection)
            selection to be a line.  If the previous selec-
     tion was a line, the selection advances to the next in the text
     (but                        %B  - Bottom (similarly)
KeyCommands>N
N - Note
     The  current  screen  display  is noted and an  see the discussion of Reverse Direction).  If  the  previous
     selection  is  smaller  than a line, the new selection is an  Acceptance is signalled  by  typing  the  INS
key.  Rejection is signalled by typing the DEL key.

     When typing  text tN is placed in the
     Thumb Bar.  The thumb bar may be used to return to  this  current
     display  by  selecting  the  N.o  the Editor,  BACK SPACE  deletes the most
recently  typed  character,   control-BACK SPACE  deletes  the  most
recently typ   
KeyCommands>LF
LF, Control-LF -  Scroll
     LF repositions the screen window so  it  displays  text  starting
     wited  word,  and  control-OOPS  deletes the  most recently
typed line up to and including the carriage return.  The RETURN  key
h  the  37th line of the previous display.  Control-LF scrolls
     in the other direction so the previous top of the  screen i(carriage return) is used to mark the end of each line in your file.
The Editor does automatic indenting for  you  by  supplyins near
     the new bottom. 
KeyCommands>B
B - Bottom
     The line containing the end of the current selection is moved  tg  leading
blanks on the new line to match those on the previous line.  You may
BACK SPACE over them or type more.

     Wheo 
     the screen.  If already there, it is moved to the bottom.  
KeyCommands>T
T - Top
     The line containing the currn the first line of text is showing on  the  screen,  it  is
indicated by a "^J" in the left margin--this is the beginning-of-tent selection is moved to the screen.  
     If already there, it is moved to the top.  
KeyCommands>W
w,  W  - Change the cext
marker.  When the last character of  the  file  is  showing  on  the
screen,  it  is  followed  by a "^K"--this is the endurrent selection to  be a word.  If the  previous 
     selection was a word,  the  selection advances to  the  next (but
    -of-text marker.
You may select this character, but try as you may, you cannot delete
it.
KeyCommands>KeyCommands.Index
Key see the discussion of Reverse Direction).  If  the  previous sel-
     ection  is  smaller  than  a word,  the new  selection Commands.Index    for Editor version V1.15K and beyond       C 1981, 3RCC

       These commands change the selection or the v is  an
     extension of the previous.  If the previous selection is  larger,
     the  first  word  is chosen from the previiew
       without use of the BitPad. 

%Space - Space, RETURN, BACKSPACE, TAB:  select next or previous character

%W - Woous
     selection.  This command uses the  repeat  count  and  Direction
     Flag.   (Unshift-w  chooses  words  that  are   8  	
s module defines the screen coordinates and size of the
{       Perq "lights".  These are portions of the screen that are
{        inverted during tedious operations such as recalibrating the
{       disk and scavenging files (in FileAccess).
{
{ Desigmodule Loader;

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Loader - Perq systen:
{       The lights must *not* extend below the 128th line of the screen.
{       The Y + Size must be less than or equal tom loader.
{       J. P. Strait    10 Feb 81.  rewritten as a module.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation,  256.
{       It is a good idea for the lights to be totally inside of the title
{          line.
{       The current lights 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This module implements the Perq POS system loader.  Given a run-file
{ name as input, it loads astart at the left leave lots of room for new
{          lights to the right of the current one.  There is room for
{          nd executes that program.  When the program
{ terminates (normally or abnormally) it returns to the loader which returns
{ to 10 lights all together
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{----------------its caller.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{ Versions:
{   20-Jan 82 Brad A. Myers  V1.2  New light for the--------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{  6 Jan 82  V2.7  Brad Myers
{ Fixed bug in reporting Qc compiler
{   28-may-81 Brad A. Myers  V1.1  Changed size and spacing of lights and
{                                    made ode version incompatibility if hint succeeds
{
{ 10 Dec 81  V2.6  WJHansen
{ changes to use type long (xxTime, stretch(0), dothem non-square
{   26-May-81 John Strait    V1.0  Started
{------------------------------------------------------------------n't use Arith)
{
{ 25 Oct 81  V2.5  John Strait
{ Changes to agree with Memory V2.11.
{ }

{ 21 Jul 81  V2.4  John Strait ---------}

exports

const

      LightUsed        = TRUE; {whether should use the lights at all}
      
      LightY            = 3;
      LightHeight      = 14;
      LightWidth       = 18;
      LightSpacing     = 3*LightWidth;
      
      module Lights;

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Lights - Perq LightLightRecalibrate = LightSpacing;
      LightScavenge    = LightRecalibrate + LightWidth + LightSpacing;
      LightSwap       s.
{       J. P. Strait  26 May 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981
{
{ Abstract:
{       Thi = LightScavenge + LightWidth + LightSpacing;
      LightCompiler    = LightSwap + LightWidth + LightSpacing;

private

    8 	
ion
     to shrink at that end.  In this mode, they do not select a single
     character,  nor  do  they change the directionr Selection 
     Space, BackSpace, Return, Tab, and a few other keys  behave as if
     the selection  line  were  a cursor f flag.  The mode is
     extinguished by any one of the commands: A, I, S, R, D, *, M,  E,
     Q.  (Thus M is a toggle.)
Keor insert.  These  selection
     commands move to a character related to  the  current  selection.
     They  all  use  the  yCommands>X
X  -  Thumb  bar (X-Coordinate selection)
     The thumb bar cursor is placed on the thumb bar line at  the  top
repeat  count.   None  are  affected  by the
     direction flag.  All reset that flag unless the More flag is set.
     When      of the screen.  The following characters are active:

        INS  -  Display  the  part  of  file  corresponding to curr the  More  flag  is set, these commands still move in their
     usual direction; thus they can be used to reduce the selectioent
             position of thumb bar cursor.
        DEL - Aborts the thumb bar.   Current selection is unaffected.
       n.
          
       SPACE -  Move  to  the  character  following  the  previous
          selection.   
       BACKSPACE  - TAB - Moves five character positions to the right.
        control-TAB - Moves five positions to the left.
        SPACE - Mo Go to the character preceding the
          previous  selection.   Control-H  is  synonymous  with  this
          command.  
     extension of the previous.  If the previous selection is  larger,
     the  first  line is chosen from the previous
   ves one position to the right.
        BACKSPACE - Moves one position to the left.
        RETURN - Moves to end of file posit  selection.  This command uses the  repeat  count  and  Direction
     Flag.
KeyCommands>G
G - Go to character
     After ion.
        Control-RETURN - Moves to beginning of file position.
        Digits - Set repeat count for TAB's and SPACE's.
 typing "G",  one  more  character  is  typed.   The  editor
     searches  the rest of the screen for the character.  If found,       S - Move to the S marker on thumb line.  This marker indicates
            the location of the current selection.
      it
     becomes the current selection.   G  uses  the  repeat  count  and
     direction  flag.   If  the  More  Flag  is  se   O - Move to O marker on line.  This marker indicates the  text
            that was displayed prior to the last  thumb bar st, the selection is
     extended to the found character.  
KeyCommands>M
M - More in selection
     Turns on More Flag, soelection.
        N - Move to the  N  marker on the line.  This marker is set by
            the N command.

     The curren all selection commands extend the  current
     selection rather than change it.  The selection grows only at the
     end int selection is unchanged.  However, if any keyselection
     commands  (C,  W,  L,  G,  space, ...) are used, the operation isdicated  by  the  Direction  Flag.   The  character  motion
     commands (SPACE, BACKSPACE, RETURN, etc.) can cause the select
     treated as though the first character  of  the  screen  had  been
     previously selected.
KeyCommands>space
Characte 9  	
.  This means that in some
{ sense the loader becomes part of the memory manager.
{ Add Hints.
{ }

{ 4 Jun 81  V2.3   John= '2.7';
   

   procedure Load( RunFileName: String );


private
                                                        Strait
{ Add Virgil headers and comments.
{ }

{ 23 May 81  V2.2   John Strait
{ Use new IOKeyDisable/IOKeyEnable in place  of old DisCtlC/EnaCtlC.
{ }

{ 18 May 81  V2.1   Brad Myers
{ Import IO_Unit and IO_Others instead of IO.
{ Added ** to ermodule Memory;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Memory - Perq memory ror messages
{ }

{ 13 May 81  V2.0  John Strait
{ Use exceptions.
{ }

{ 13 Apr 81  V1.9  John Strait
{ Fix bug in multmanager.
{       J. P. Strait        1 Jan 80.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.
{
{ Abstract:i-sector read code.
{ }

{ 10 Apr 81  V1.8  John Strait
{ Use new RunRead module.
{ }

{  6 Apr 81  V1.7  John Strait
{ 
{       Memory is the Perq memory manager.  It supervises the segment tables
{       and exports procedures for manipulating m1) Fix bug in Q-code version processing.
{ 2) Stuff for virtual memory.
{ 3) Make use of new ProgramSN in RunHeader.
{ }

{emory segments.
{       Perq physical memory is segmented into separately addressable items
{       (called segments) which ma 30 Mar 81  V1.6  Brad Myers.
{ Use local lookup for seg file names.
{ }

{ 25 Mar 81  V1.5  John Strait.
{ Improved retriey contain either code or data.
{
{ Design:
{       See the Q-Code reference manual.
{
{------------------------------------s and messages from retry mechanism.
{ }

{ 25 Mar 81  V1.5  John Strait.
{ Improved retries and messages from retry mechani-----------------------------------------}

{ 16 Nov 81  V2.13  DAS
{ Fixed to work with ten MBaud ethernet.
{ }

{ 25 Ocsm.
{ }

{ 20 Mar 81  V1.4  Miles A. Barel
{ Added QCode Version Checks and long file names
{ }

{ 3 Mar 81  V1.3  John St 81  V2.12  JPS 
{ Enlarge segment table to 512 entries when more than 1/4 MByte.
{ }

{ 25 Oct 81  V2.11  JPS 
{ Implementrait.
{ Improve retry mechanism to immediately do a recalibrate after an
{ address error.
{ }

{ 1 Mar 81  V1.2  John Strat full hints in Memory.
{ 1) The two added words (for the UpdateTime) are overlayed on the two
{    words of Increment, Maximuit.
{ Speed up the loader by using multi-sector reads from the hard disk.
{ If errors, abort loading before loading the stack m, and FreeList which are not used for
{    Code segments.
{ 2) ChangeSize and NewP now check to be sure the segment is a Datasegment.
{ }

{ 23 Feb 81  V1.1  RFR.
{ Changed <= to = FSLookup test.
{ }

{ 10 Feb 81  V1.0  John Strait.
{ Start file segment.
{ 3) FindCodeSegment compares hints.
{ }

{  6 Oct 81  V2.10  JPS 
{ Fix bug in CreateSegment:  It cannot call Ch
{ Change the loader to add segments to the segment table (marked as swapped-
{ out) rather than actually load them into memory.
{ }
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports


   const LoaderVersion  9 	
st
          character  of  line  following   the   previous   selection.
          Control-U  is synonymous with this command .  
       Control-RETURN
          - Go back to first preceding non-blank that follows a  CRLF.
          Control-OOPS is sy nonymous to this command.
                                                                                                                   
       TAB  -  Advance  five  characters  from  end  of
          previous selection.  
       Control-TAB - Go back five   characters
          from  beginning of previous selection.  
       Control BACKSPACE -
          Go to the  beginning  of   the  word  preceding  the  current
          selection.  Control-w and Control-W are synonymous with this
          command; s hift-control-W treats a word  as  any  consecutive
          string  of  printable  characters.   
       RETURN - Move to fir  :  	
e not needed by
{ programs which import the memory manager.
{ Remove Concat call from MemoryError.
{ Remove import of Perq.Stt 80  V1.1  JPS
{ Add support for the diagnostic display (DDS).
{ }

exports


const MemoryVersion = '2.13';


importring.
{ }

{ 24 Feb 81  V1.7  JPS
{ 1) Allow the ScreenSeg to change sizes.  To allow this, the memory
{    manager must prs SystemDefs from SystemDefs;
imports Code from Code;


const SATSeg = 1;              { SAT segment }
      SITSeg = 2;   angeSize to shorten a hole
{ because the new size may be larger than 256 blocks.  ChangeSize would
{ raise BadSize exception.event system segments (those with RefCount > 1) from
{    being moved into the area of memory which might be used for the
{   
{ }

{  4 Oct 81  V2.9  JPS 
{ Change InitMemory to figure out how much physical memory the machine has.
{ }

{ 18 Sep 81 screen.  This is a hack which guarantees that the system can expand
{    the screen to its original size after returning from   V2.8  WJH 
{ Set Mobility to Swappable in CreateSegment.
{ }

{ 26 Jul 81  V2.7  JPS
{ Fix bug in order of operations in a user program.
{    This change was originally made by RFR, but had to be converted for
{    memory manager version 1.5 and gCreateSegment.
{ }

{ 21 Jul 81  V2.6  JPS
{ Don't use MaxSegment anywhere.
{ }

{ 29 Jun 81  V2.5  JPS
{ Destroy swappireater.
{ 2) Remove PrintTable and PrintFreeList.
{ }

{ 23 Feb 81  V1.6  RFR
{ Added DK and CH to system boot record (theyng files when swapping is disabled.
{ }

{ 4 Jun 81  V2.4  JPS
{ Add Virgil headers for exceptions.
{ }

{ 26 May 81  V2. will be filled by the boot
{ microcode with the disk number and boot character used in booting).
{ }

{ 18 Feb 81  V1.5  JP3  JPS
{ Add CurrentSegment function.
{ Prevent Memory from being swapped during FindHole calls.
{ }

{ 21 may 81  V2.2  JPS
{ Define fields in the SIT to remember names of boot loaded segments.
{ Remove most of InitMemory since it is done now by MaS
{ Initialize BootSegId in EnableSwapping.
{ }

{ 14 May 81  V2.1  GGR
{ Add support for 3 MBaud EtherNet.
{ }

{ 12 MakeBoot.  Make IOSeg
{ a constant.
{ }

{ 17 Feb 81  V1.4  DAS
{ Removed the include file SegNumbers.  Placed the segment nuy 81  V2.0  JPS
{ 1) Split Memory into two modules: Memory (user callable routines, swappable)
{    and Virtual (system callabmber
{ definitions inline.
{ }

{ 16 Feb 81  V1.3  DAS
{ Changed to use Perq_String from Perq.String
{ }

{ 11 Feb 81   le routines, unswappable).
{ 2) Move FileIdToSegId and SegIdToFileId into Memory.
{ 3) Use exceptions and get rid of MemoryErr     DCF
{ Changed calls to PString to conform to new PString.  This module is
{ compatable with the new System and Compiler.or.
{ }

{ 24 Mar 81  V1.9  JPS
{ Begin adding stuff for virtual memory.
{ }

{ 23 Mar 81  V1.8  JPS
{ Convert to standa
{ }

{ 13 Jan 81  V1.2  JPS
{ 1) Allocate the IOSeg in memory manager initialization as a locked
{    segment at the high erd documentation form.
{ Delete DEBUG stuff.
{ Delete OutputF.
{ Add "MM" to the beginning of names which are exported but arnd of memory.  Use the last block in memory (the
{    Krnl no longer needs it).
{ 2) Move $R- to private part.
{ }

{ 10 Oc : 	
                           ;  	
    


type MMBit4 = 0..#17;
     MMBit8 = 0..#377;
     MMBit12 = 0..#7777;
     MMIntSize = 0..MMMaxIntSize;
     MMExt* ENTRIES MUST BE EIGHT WORDS LONG **** }
      1: { real SIT entry }
         (NextSeg    : SegmentNumber;
          RefCounSize = 1..MMMaxExtSize;
     MMAddress = integer;
     MMPosition = (MMLowPos, MMHighPos);

     SegmentNumber = integer;
t   : 0..MMMaxCount;
          IOCount    : 0..MMMaxCount;
          Mobility   : SegmentMobility;
          BootLoaded : Boo
     SegmentKind = (CodeSegment, DataSegment);
     
     SegmentMobility = (UnMovable, UnSwappable, LessSwappable, Swappablelean;
          SwapInfo   : record case {BootLoaded:} Boolean of
                         True:  (BootLowerAddress: Integer;);

     MMFreeNode = record
      N: MMAddress;
      L: integer
      end;
      
     MMBlockArray = array[0..0] of ar
                                 BootUpperAddress: Integer;
                                 BootLogBlock: Integer);
        ray[0..127] of integer;
     
     pMMBlockArray = ^MMBlockArray;

     MMArray = record case Integer of
                1:                 False: (DiskLowerAddress: Integer;
                                 DiskUpperAddress: Integer;
                         { SIT segement }
      FontSeg = 3;             { font segment }
      ScreenSeg = 4;           { screen segment } (m: array[0..0] of MMFreeNode);
                2: (w: array[0..0] of Integer)
                end;

     pMMArray = ^MMArr
      CursorSeg = 5;           { cursor segment }
      IOSeg = 6;               { IO segment }
      SysNameSeg = 7;        ay;

     MMPointer = record case integer of
      1: (P: ^integer);
      2: (B: pMMBlockArray);
      3: (M: pMMArray);
  { system segment names }
      
      BootedMemoryInBlocks = #1000;    { memory in blocks at boot time }
      MaxSegment =      4: (Offset: MMAddress;
          Segmen: SegmentNumber)
      end;

     SATentry = packed record { Segment Address Ta #137;       { should be 2**16 - 1 }

      SetStkBase = #60;
      SetStkLimit = #120;

{$ifc Ether3MBaud then}
      IOSble }
      { **** ENTRIES MUST BE TWO WORDS LONG **** }
      NotResident : boolean;            { 001 }
      Moving      : egSize = 6;           { number of blocks in the IOSeg }
{$elsec}
{$ifc Ether10MBaud then}
      IOSegSize = 3;           { nuboolean;            { 002 }
      RecentlyUsed: boolean;            { 004 }
      Sharable    : boolean;            { 010 }
 mber of blocks in the IOSeg }
{$elsec}
      IOSegSize = 3;           { number of blocks in the IOSeg }
{$endc}
{$endc}
        Kind        : SegmentKind;        { 020 }
      Full        : boolean;            { 040 }
      InUse       : boolean;      
      SysSegLength = 8;       { length of name of a boot-loaded segment }

      MMMaxBlocks = #400;      { maximum numbe         { 100 }
      Lost        : boolean;  { *** }   { 200 }
      BaseLower   : MMBit8;
      BaseUpper   : MMBit4;
   r of blocks in a segment }
      MMMaxCount = #377;
      MMMaxIntSize = MMMaxBlocks-1;
      MMMaxExtSize = MMMaxBlocks;
     Size        : MMBit12
      end;

     SITentry = packed record case integer of { Segment Information Table }
      { *** ; 	
                           <  	
    { first free segment number }
           FC: SegmentNumber;     { first system code segment }
           DK: integer;     umber );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       UnusedSegment       { disk system was booted from }
           CH: integer            { char used in booting }
           end)
      end;
is raised when the memory manager encounters a segment
{       number which references a segment which is not in use.  This may
     SATarray = array[0..0] of SATentry;

     SITarray = array[0..0] of SITentry;

     pSAT = ^SATarray;

     pSIT =  mean
{       that a bad segment number was passed to some memory manager routine
{       or that a bad address was de-referen^SITarray;

     MMEdge = record
             H: SegmentNumber;  { Head }
             T: SegmentNumber   { Tail }
        ced.
{
{ Parameters:
{       S - Segment number of the unused segment.
{
{-------------------------------------------------     end;

     SysSegName = packed array[1..SysSegLength] of Char;
     
     pSysNames = ^SysNameArray;
     
     SysNa----------------------------}


 exception NotDataSegment( S: SegmentNumber );
{--------------------------------------------meArray = array[0..0] of SysSegName;
     
             
 procedure InitMemory;
 procedure DataSeg( var S: SegmentNumber );---------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       NotDataSegment is raised when the number of a code segment is passed
 procedure CodeOrDataSeg( var S: SegmentNumber );
 procedure ChangeSize( S: SegmentNumber; Fsize: MMExtSize );
 procedure Cre
{       to some memory manager routine that requires the number of a data
{       segment.
{
{ Parameters:
{       S - SegmateSegment( var S: SegmentNumber;
                          Fsize, Fincrement, Fmaximum: MMExtSize );
 procedure IncRefCount( ent number of the code segment.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 except                   DiskId: Integer)
                         end;
          case SegmentKind of
            DataSegment: (IncS: SegmentNumber );
 procedure SetMobility( S: SegmentNumber; M: SegmentMobility );
 procedure DecRefCount( S: SegmentNumber )rement  : MMIntSize;
                          Maximum    : MMIntSize;
                          Freelist   : MMAddress);
   ;
 procedure SetIncrement( S: SegmentNumber; V: MMExtSize );
 procedure SetMaximum( S: SegmentNumber; V: MMExtSize );
 proced         CodeSegment: (Update     : TimeStamp)
         );
      2: { boot time information }
         (BootBlock: record
  ure SetSharable( S: SegmentNumber; V: boolean );
 procedure SetKind( S: SegmentNumber; V: SegmentKind );
 procedure MarkMemory         CS: SegmentNumber;     { initial code segment }
           SS: SegmentNumber;     { initial stack segment }
         ;
 procedure CleanUpMemory;
 procedure FindCodeSegment( var S: SegmentNumber; Hint: SegHint );
 procedure EnableSwapping( Whe  XX: Integer;           { unused }
           VN: Integer;           { system version number }
           FF: SegmentNumber; re: Integer );
 procedure DisableSwapping;
 function  CurrentSegment: SegmentNumber;
 
 exception UnusedSegment( S: SegmentN < 	
                           =  	
ly means that the size passed to
{       CreateSegment or ChangeSize is greater than the maximum size or
{       less than one----------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception CantMoveSegment( S: SegmentNumber );
{-.
{
{ Parameters:
{       Fsize - The bad Size value.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       CantMoveSegment is raised -----------}


 exception BadIncrement( S: SegmentNumber; Fincrement: Integer );
{------------------------------------------when the memory manager attempts to move
{       a segment which is UnMovable or has a non-zero IO count.
{
{ Parameters:
{ -----------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       BadIncrement is raised when a bad Increment value is passed to some      S - The number of the segment which cannot be moved.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------
{       memory manager routine.  This usually means that the increment passed
{       to CreateSegment is greater than 256 or-------------}


 exception PartNotMounted;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 less than one.
{
{ Parameters:
{       Fincrement - The bad Increment value.
{
{------------------------------------------{
{ Abstract:
{       PartNotMounted is raised when
{               1) the memory manager attempts to swap a data segment out-----------------------------------}


 exception BadMaximum( S: SegmentNumber; Fmaximum: Integer );
{---------------------- for
{                  the first time
{       and     2) the partition which is to be used for swapping is no longer
{      -------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       BadMaximum is raised when a bad Maximum value i            mounted.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception SwapInFs passed to some memory
{       manager routine.  This usually means that the maximum passed to
{       CreateSegment is greatailure( S: SegmentNumber );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{  er than 256 or less than one.
{
{ Parameters:
{       Fmaximum - The bad Maximum value.
{
{--------------------------------     SwapInFailure is raised when the swap file cannot be found for a
{       segment which is marked as swapped out.  This is ---------------------------------------------}


 exception FullMemory;
{---------------------------------------------------an error which
{       should never happen in a debugged system.  It usually means that
{       there is a bug in the memory mion BadSize( S: SegmentNumber; Fsize: Integer );
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       FullMemory is raised when there is not enough physical memory to
{       sa
{
{ Abstract:
{       BadSize is raised when a bad Size value is passed to some memory
{       manager routine.  This usualtisfy some memory manager request.  This is raised only after
{       swapping segments out and compacting memory.
{
{------- = 	
                           >  	
t discovers that there is not
{       enough room to allocate and the segment cannot be enlarged (its
{       size has reached anager or that the segment tables
{       have been clobbered.
{
{ Parameters:
{       S - The number of the segment which c its maximum).
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception NoFreeSegmentould not be swapped in.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception Edges;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       NoFreeSegments is raFailure;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       EdgeFailure isised when the memory manager discovers that all
{       of the segment numbers are in use and it needs another one.  This
{    raised by MakeEdge when it discovers that the SIT
{       entries are not linked together into a circular list.  This is an
{    is equivalent to "Segment table full".
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}
       error which should never happen in a debugged system.  It usually
{       means that there is a bug in the memory manage

 exception SwapError;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{    r or that the segment
{       tables have been clobbered.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------   SwapError is raised if the one of the memory managers swapping
{       routines is called when swapping is disabled.  This i-------------}


 exception NilPointer;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{s an error which
{       should never happen in a debugged system.  It usually means that
{       there is a bug in the memory Abstract:
{       NilPointer is raised when a Nil pointer is used or passed to Dispose.
{
{--------------------------------- manager.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 

var SAT: pSAT;
    SIT:--------------------------------------------}


 exception BadPointer;
{---------------------------------------------------- pSIT;
    MMFirst, MMFree, MMLast, MMHeap: SegmentNumber;
    MMHole: MMEdge;
    MMState: (MMScan1, MMScan2, MMScan3, MMSca-------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       BadPointer is raised when a bad pointer is passed to Dispose.
{
{ Parametern4, MMScan5,
              MMScan6, MMScan7, MMScan8, MMScan9, MMScan10,
              MMScan11,
              MMNotFound, MMs:
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


 exception FullSegment;
{----------Found);
    StackSegment: SegmentNumber;
    FirstSystemSeg: SegmentNumber;
    BootFileId: Integer;
    SwappingAllowed: Bo-------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       FullSegment is raised by New when iolean;
    SwapId: Integer;
    MemoryInBlocks: Integer;  { amount of memory on this machine }
 
 
private

              > 	
                           ?  	
1  JPS
{ Set R- in private part.
{ }
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

expo rts


imports Memory from Memory;


procedure CopySegment( SrcSeg, DstSeg: SegmentNumber; NewDstBase: Integer );


priv ate

                                                                                                                         module PasLong;


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       PasLong - Extra Module MultiRead;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
   MultiRead - Module to Multstream package input conversion routines.
{       J. P. Strait & Michael R. Kristofic  ca. 15 Sep 81.
{       Copyright (C) Thmodule MoveMem;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       MoveMem - Move memori-sector read a file into memory.

   Written by Brad Myers    24 Jul 81.

   Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporatioy.
{       J. P. Strait   ca. 1 Jan 80.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980, 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
n, 1981.

 Abstract:
       This Module exports a procedure to read a file very quickly into
       memory.  The memory for {       MoveMem is used to move a segment from one location to another in
{       physical memory.  The two locations may overlthe blocks of the file to be read must be
       allocated contiguously before the call is made.  Typically, this
       will ap.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{---------------------------------be done by using CreateSegment.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{  7 Jan 82 V1.8 Brad Myers
{      Change IOKeyDisable ... to I--------------------------------------------------------------------
  Change Log:
     24-Jul-81  V1.0  Brad Myers
         ntOn off.
{
{  4 Jan 82 V1.7 WJHansen
{      Don't call IOGetTime or IOKeyXXXAble if system not initialized
{
{ 10 Dec 81 V      Created by modifying code in the Loader
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}
1.6  WJHansen
{    change DoubleWORD AND xxTime to long; remove Arith
{
{ 9 Jul 81  V1.5  JPS
{ Use IOKeyDisable and IOKeyEn
{//////////////////////////} EXPORTS {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

Imports FileSystem from FileSystem;

Procedure MultiReaable rather than INTOFF and INTON.
{ }

{ 18 May 81  V1.4  BAM
{ Change import from IO to IO_Others.
{ }

{ 18 Apr 81  V1d(fid: FileID; addr: pDirBlk; firstBlock,numBlocks: integer);

{//////////////////////////} PRIVATE {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\.3  JPS
{ Gather statistics.
{ }

{ 24 Mar 81  V1.2  JPS
{ Convert to standard documentation form.
{ }

{ 17 Feb 81  V1.\}
                                                                                                                             ? 	
                           @  	
g; Field, B: integer );


private
                                                                                          
{ }

{ Date: 16-Dec-80  V2.0
{ Who: Brad A. Myers
{ Added New procedures: PosC, AppendString, AppendChar, UpperCase, ConvUp per.
{ }

{ 27-Nov-80  1.1  Don Scelza
{ Fixed a bug in SubStr.  Added calls to UserError for errors.
{ (Not released)
{ } 

{ Date: 30-Apr-80
{ Who: Don Scelza
{ Changed ConCat and SubStr to use temp strings for their hacking.
{ This will allow  a use to pass the same string as input and result
{ parameters.
{ }

{ Date: 8-Apr-80
{ Who: Don Scelza
{ Created the striModule PERQ_String;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ PERQ String manipulating hacking module.
{ }
{------------------------------------------------------------------------}



{-------------------on routines.
{ Written by: Donald Scelza
{ Copyright (C) 1980
{ Three Rivers Computer Corporastion
{
{ Abstract:
{    This------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Strings in PERQ Pascal are stored a single character per byte with module implements the string manipulation routines for the
{    Three Rivers PERQ Pascal.
{
{    Strings in PERQPascal are s
{ the byte indexed by 0 being the length of the string.  When the routines
{ in this module must access the length byte they mree Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{ 
{ Abstract:
{       PasLong is the extra character input module of the Stream packatored a single character per byte with
{    the byte indexed by 0 being the length of the string.  When the
{    routines in tge.
{       Its routines are called by code generated by the Pascal compiler 
{       in response to variations on Read, Readlhis module must access the length byte, they must turn
{    off range checking.
{
{------------------------------------------n, Write and Writeln 
{       statements. It is one level above Module Stream and uses Stream's
{       lower-level input rout---------------------------------}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{    Chanines.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ 15 Sep 81  V2.2 John Strait ange Log:
{
{ Date: 27 Jan 82   V2.4
{ Who: Brad Myers
{ Fixed some comments
{ }

{ Date: 20 May 81   V2.3
{ Who: JE Ball d Mike Kristofic.
{ Creation - Double precision read and write routine ReadD and WriteD.
{ }


exports
 

imports Strea(CMU) and Brad Myers
{ Rewrote copy loop in Insert
{ Added new function: RevPosC
{ }

{ Date: 13-May-81  V2.2
{ Who: John m from Stream;
 
 
 procedure ReadD( var F: FileType; var X: long; B: integer );
 procedure WriteD( var F: FileType; X : lonStrait
{ Use exceptions.
{ }

{ Date: 19-Jan-81  V2.1
{ Who: Diana Connan Forgy
{ Changed ConCat and SubStr to functions. @ 	
                           A  	
---------------------------------------------------------------------}

{********************}  Exports  {********************module PMatch;

{--------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract: 
{    Does pattern matching o}


Const MaxPStringSize=255;          { Length of strings}
Type PString = String[MaxPStringSize];

Procedure Adjust(Var Sn strings
{
{            Patterns accepted are as follows:
{
{
{              "*" matches 0 or more characters.
{
{      TR:PString;  LEN:Integer);
Function Concat(Str1,Str2:PString):PString;
Function Substr(Source:PString;  Index,Size: Integer):P        "&" matches 1 or more characters.
{
{              "#" matches exactly 1 character.
{
{              "'0" matches anString;
Procedure Delete(Var Str:PString;  Index,Size:Integer);
Procedure Insert(Var Source,Dest:PString; Index:Integer);
Funy digit.
{
{              "'A" matches any alphabetic (capitals only unless casefold).
{
{              "'a" matches any alpction Pos(Source,Mask:PString): Integer;

FUNCTION PosC(s: PString; c: Char): Integer;
PROCEDURE AppendString(var s1: PStringhabetic(lower case only unless 'casefold').
{
{              "'@" matches any non-alphanumeric.
{
{              "'*" matche; s2: PString);
PROCEDURE AppendChar(var s: PString; c: Char);
FUNCTION UpperCase(c: Char): Char;
PROCEDURE ConvUpper(Var s: s '*', other patterns chars can be quoted also.
{             
{ Written by: Gene Ball at CMU
{------------------------------PString);

Exception StrBadParm;
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract: Raise--------------------------------}

{--------------------------------------------------------------
 Change log:
     28-Decd when bad index or length parameters passed to procedures or
           sometimes when string will be too long (other times, S-81 Brad Myers  V2.5  Removed IsPattern removal of ' if not pattern.
      1-Dec-81 Brad Myers  V2.4  Changed length of files ctrLong is
           raised in this case
-------------------------------------------------------------------------}

Functioompared to 255
      1-Dec-81 Brad Myers  V2.3  Fixed so IsPattern removes ' if not pattern
     13-Aug-81 Brad Myers  V2.2  Fn RevPosC(s: PString; c: char): integer;

{********************}  Private  {********************}
                           ixed exit in IsPattern so didn't exit from
                                  PattMatch so no crash if string ends in "'"
     ust turn off range
{ checking.  The effective definition of strings is:
{     Type String = RECORD
{                     leng th: 0..255;
{                     chars: PACKED ARRAY[1..MaxLength] of Char;
{                   END;
{ Note that the charact ers are packed and that the first index is 1.
{ See the PERQ Pascal Extensions manual for more information on strings.
{
{---  A 	
                           B  	
15-May-81 Brad Myers  V2.1  Added new exception and changed module name
                                 Use the PERQ_String fu nction uppercase
                                 Added comments in 3RCC style
     ??-Apr-81 Gene Ball   V2.0  Fixed bugs in Module PopCmdParse;
{---------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{    This module providesPattMatch and added new
                                  procedures PattMap and IsPattern
     13-Mar-81 Brad Myers  V1.1  Fi procedures to help with PopUp menus.  See
{    the module PopUp for the definition of pNameDesc and for some
{    useful procxed a small bug and changed import from
                                    PERQ.String to PERQ_String
     ??-Feb-81 Gene Baledures for creating and destroying pNameDescs.
{
{ Written by Brad Myers    Nov 18, 1981
{
{ Copyright (C) 1981 Three Riversl   V1.0  Started
--------------------------------------------------------------}

{/////////////////////////////} Exports { Computer Corperation
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------}


{-----------------------------\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

Type pms255 = String[255];

Function PattMatch(var str,pattern: pms255; fold: boolean): bo-------------------------------------
{ Change Log:
{
{ Date: 26 Jan-82  V1.8 Brad Myers
{ Only character illegal after a coolean;
Function PattMap(var str,inpatt,outpatt,outstr:pms255; fold:boolean): boolean;
Procedure PattDebug(v: boolean);
Functimmand is "=" in IGetCmdLine.
{ Extra blank input at the end of command files.
{ Use PointAllowed.


{ Date: 21 Jan-82  V1.7on IsPattern(var str: pms255): boolean;

Exception BadPatterns;
{------------------------------------------------------------ Brad Myers
{ No popup if isFloppy
{

{ Date:  8 Jan-82  V1.6 Brad Myers
{ Fixed Type ahead bug if in a command file.
{ Fi---
 Abstract: Raised if outPatt and inPatt do not have the same patterns
            in the same order for PattMap
---------xed PopUniqueCmdIndex to find a command if it equals another even if it
{   is shorter.  Eg.  in table are "p" and "path".  "p"------------------------------------------------------}
 
{/////////////////////////////} Private {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ will get "p" even
{    though is not unique.
{ Help on PopUp menus.

{ Date:  5 Jan-82  V1.5 Brad Myers
{ No beep if Pop n\\\\}
                                                                                                                         ot OK for GetCmdLine and GetConfirm.

{ Date:  4 Jan-82  V1.4 Brad Myers
{ Fixed bug in CmdFile prompt character in GetCmdLin e.
{ Re-instated IdleProc.

{ Date: 30 Dec-81  V1.3 Brad Myers
{ Fixed Destroy ==> Dstry for new CmdParse.
{ Added NullIdle Proc.

{ Date: 30 Nov-81  V1.1 Brad Myers
{ Moved alloc and destroy Name desc to popUp.
{ Change GetConfirm to take prompt a B 	
                           C  	
 This program produces pop up windows that replace the screen
            area at a specified cursor location. The cursor is th---------------------------------------------}


{-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-} EXPORTS {-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-}

en changed and
            PopUp waits for a press.  Whenever the cursor is inside the window,
            the command at thatEXCEPTION BadMenu;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abstract: Raised when parame point is highlighted.  If a press is done
            inside the window, the highlighted command is selected.  The
          ters are illegal.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

EXCEPTION Outside;
{------nd default.  

{ }
{ Date: 19 Nov-81  V1.0 Brad Myers
{ Started.  
{ }
{--------------------------------------------------  user can control whether one or more than one command should
            be selected before window is removed.  If a press ou----------------}


{********************} Exports {********************}

Imports CmdParse from CmdParse;
Imports PopUp tside
            outside, no command is executed.  In any case, the window is
            erased and the original contents offrom PopUp;

Function PopUniqueCmdIndex(Cmd: CString; Var names: pNameDesc): Integer;

Function GetCmdLine(Procedure IdlePro that area is returned

 Copyright (C) 1981 - The Three Rivers Computer Corporation
-----------------------------------------c; prompt: String;
                    var line, cmd: CString; var inF: pCmdList;
                    var names: pNameDesc; va------------------------------------}


{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Chanr firstPress: boolean;
                    popOK: boolean): integer;

Function GetShellCmdLine(var cmd: CString; var inF: pCmge Log:
      19 Jan 82  Brad A. Myers V2.4  Handle the exception HelpKey.
      17 Sep-81  Brad A. Myers V2.3  fixed commentsdList;
                 var names: pNameDesc): integer;

Function GetConfirm(Procedure IdleProc; popOK: boolean;
           .  Made so will work with
                                     any current font.
      28-Aug-81  Brad A. Myers V2.2  Fixed hi          prompt: String; def: integer;
                     var switches: pSwitchRec): integer;

Procedure NullIdleProc;

sterises for bottom command.
                                     Made it harder to select the bottom
                        {********************} Private {********************}
                                                                                        command when trying to hit the scroll
                                       bar.
      22-Jul-81  Brad A. Myer(****)
Module PopUp;
(*****)
(*****
Program PopUp(input, output);
(******)

{--------------------------------------------s V2.1  Handlers for ^C and ^Shift-C.
      22-Jul-81  Brad A. Myers V2.0  removed interface to TheFront.
      20-Nov-80  Bra--------------------------------
 PopUp displays "popUp" menu windows 
 
 Written by  Brad A. Myers 16-Nov-80
  
 Abstract:d A. Myers V1.1  Changed interface to TheFront.
      16-Nov-80  Brad A. Myers V1.0  Started.
-------------------------------- C 	
                           D  	
ameDesc);
PROCEDURE DestroyNameDesc(Var names: pNameDesc);

{-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-} PRIVATE {-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-* -*-*-}
                                                                                                                          module Profile;

{----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{    This module is MODULE PopUpCurs;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract:  This module sets uused to get information from the user profile
{    file.
{
{ Written by: Don Scelza
{
{ Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computerp and sets the various cursors used by PopUp.
 Written by Brad A. Myers
 Copyright (C) 1981 - Three Rivers Computer Corporatio Corperation,  1981
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ 28 Dec-81  V1.1  Brad n
----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------------------------------------------Myers
{ Fixed so PFileEntry only returns a blank line when no more inputs.
{ Changed length of strings returned to be 255!!
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Abstract: raised when press outside of menu.
------------------------------------------
  Change log:
    17-Aug-81  V2.1  Brad Myers  fixed comments and picture for Scroll Bar
  --------------------------------------------------------------------}

Type s25 = String[25];
     NameAr = Array[1..1] of s2  22-Jul-81  V2.0  Brad Myers  fixed for POS version D
    14-Nov-80  V0.1  Brad Myers  started.
-----------------------------5;
     pNameAr = ^NameAr;
     NameDesc = Record
                   header: s25;
                   numCommands: integer;
-----------------------------------------------}

{-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-} EXPORTS {-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*                   commands: NameAr;
                 End;
     pNameDesc = ^NameDesc;

     ResRes = ^ResArray;
     ResAr-*-}

Type CursType = (Default, Select, Scroll, DoIt, Bar);
     FootAr = ARRAY [0..8] of ARRAY [0..3] of Integer;
     pFooray = Record
                 numIndices: integer;
                 indices: Array[1..1] of integer;
                End;

tAr = ^FootAr;
     
PROCEDURE InitCurs;
PROCEDURE DestroyCurs;

PROCEDURE SetCurs(t: CursType);

PROCEDURE InitFooter(VAPROCEDURE Menu(names: pNameDesc; isList: boolean;
               first, last, curX, curY, maxYsize: integer; VAR res: ResRes);R scrollP: pFootAr;  VAR spotP: pFootAr;
                         VAR footW: integer);
                         
{-*-*-*-*-*-

PROCEDURE InitPopUp;
PROCEDURE DestroyRes(var res: ResRes);

PROCEDURE AllocNameDesc(numNames, seg: Integer; Var names: pN*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-} PRIVATE {-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-}
                                                            D 	
                           E  	

{        #<Next subsystem>---
{
{ The base unit of the file is a text line.  The function that provides
{ values from the pmber generator.
      J. P. Strait    15 Sep 80.
      Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.
      
      rofile file will return a line of text each time that it
{ is called.  All text line between the #<Subsystem name> and the next
      Module RandomNumbers contains two routines:
      
        InitRandom - initializes the random number generator.
     
{ #<Subsystem name> are assumed to be assoicated with the first subsystem.
{ Successive calles to PFileEntry will return the    
        Random - a function which returns a new random number each time
                 it is referenced.
              next line of text for the
{ current subsystem.
{
{----------------------------------------------------------------------}

   
      There is currently no way to seed the generator.
      
      Random is a feedback shift-register pseudo-random numException PNotFound(FileName: String);
{------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Rber generator.
      The algorithm used is one described in the article:
      
           'Generalized Feedback Shift Registaised when profile file cannot be found
  Parameters: fileName is profile not found
------------------------------------------er Pseudorandom Number
                 Generator'
           T. G. Lewis and W. H. Payne
           JACM Vol. 20, No. 3, Jul------------------------------}

Exception PNotInited;
{---------------------------------------------------------------------y 1973, pp. 456-468.
           
      Random produces multidimensional pseudo-random numbers equally
      distributed in th---
  Abstract: Raised when a profile procedure is used but PFileInit not called
              first
------------------------e interval -32768..32767 and has a period of
      2^98.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}

Type ProfStr = String[255];

procedure PFileInit(PFileName, SubSystem: Pr---}

{------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Change log:
      
       1 Jun 81  BAM  }

{ 30-Apr-81  V1.0  Don Scelza
{ Created the module.
{ }


{********************} Exports {********************}

{ofStr);

function PFileEntry: ProfStr;

{*******************} Private {*********************}
                             ---------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{    This module provides facilities that will allow a  program to get
{ information from the user profile.
{
{    The profile file is a text file that has the form:
{
{        # <Subsystem name> <Line of text for that sub system>
{        <More text for that subsystem>
{        -
{        -
{        -module RandomNumbers;
{------------------------------------------------------------------------
     RandomNumbers - Random nu E 	
                           F  	
--------------------------}

{////////////////////////////} exports {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}

procedure InitRandom;
func{ RD Definitions.
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       RD.Dfs - Routine dtion Random: integer;
 
{////////////////////////////} private {\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\}
                                  ictionary definitions.
{       Horst Mauersberg, Brian Rosen, Miles Barel     ca. 1 Jan 80.
{       J. P. Strait                      rewritten        21 Nov 80.
{       Copyright (c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1980.
{
{ Abstract:
{       This  file defines offsets within routine dictionary entries.
{
{------------------------------------------------------------------ -----------}

{  6 Jun 80  1.1  Brad Myers
{ Corrected errors in comments:  RDPS is the parameter size.
{ }

{ 21 Nov 80 MODULE Raster;
{--------------------------------------------------------------
  Support definitions for RasterOp
  
  Copyw 1.0  John Strait
{ Start file.
{ }

      RDPS       = 0;  { Parameter Size - number of words of parameters }
      RDRPSrite (C) 1980 - The Three Rivers Computer Corporation
--------------------------------------------------------------}

{-----      = 1;  { Result + Parameter Size - RDPS + words of result }
      RDLTS      = 2;  { Local + Temporary Size - total words ---------------------------------------------------------
 Versions:
   2-Jun-81  Brad Myers   Added comments
  ??-???-80  ??of locals }
      RDEntry    = 3;  { Entry point address - byte offset from code base }
      RDExit     = 4;  { Exit point ad           Started
--------------------------------------------------------------}

EXPORTS

  Const RRpl    = 0;       { Rdress - byte offset from code base }
      RDLL       = 5;  { Lexical Level }
      RDFree6    = 6;  { unused }
      RDFree7aster Op function codes }
        RNot    = 1;
        RAnd    = 2;
        RAndNot = 3;
        ROr     = 4;
        ROrNo    = 7;  { unused }
                                                                                                          t  = 5;
        RXor    = 6;
        RXNor   = 7;
        
  Type RasterPtr = ^RasterArray; {a pointer that can be used as R asterOp 
                                    or Line source and destination }
       RasterArray = Array[0..0] of integer;

  V1.2  Add comments.
      17 Sep 80  JPS  V1.1  Correct an error in the table.
----------------------------------------------PRIVATE
                                                                                                                        F 	
                           G  	
geDisk(addr : DiskAddr)   : ptrDiskBuffer;
function  ReadHeader(addr : DiskAddr)   : ptrHeader;
function  ChangeHeader(addr : module Reader;


{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       Reader - Stream pDiskAddr) : ptrHeader;
procedure FlushDisk(addr : DiskAddr);
procedure WriteDisk(addr : DiskAddr; ptr : ptrDiskBuffer; hdptr :ackage input conversion routines.
{       J. P. Strait   ca. 1 Jan 81.
{       Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer CorporationModule ReadDisk;
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{   Module to  ptrHeader);
procedure WriteHeader(addr : DiskAddr; ptr : ptrDiskBuffer; hdptr : ptrHeader);

procedure InitBuffers;
functioRead and write to the disk using a buffer system

   Written by the CMU Spice Group
-----------------------------------------n  FindDiskBuffer(dskaddr : DiskAddr; alwaysfind : boolean) : integer;
procedure ReleaseBuffer(indx : integer);
procedure Flus---------------------------------}

{--------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Versions:
hBuffer(indx : integer);
procedure FlushAll;
procedure ChangeBuffer(indx : integer);
procedure ChgHdr(indx : integer);
proce
     12 Jan 82  BAM   V1.5  Fixed FlushFail bugs in FlushAll, ForgetAll. 
      3 Dec 81  BAM   V1.4  Change FlushFail to produre UseBuffer(indx,numtimes : integer);
function  BufferPointer(indx : integer) : ptrDiskBuffer;
function  HeaderPointer(indxvide more information. 
                             Change FlushBuffer to get the info.
     12 May 81  BAM   V1.3  Add excep : integer) : ptrHeader;
function  ReadAhead(addr : DiskAddr)     : ptrDiskBuffer;
procedure ForgetAll;

Exception FlushFailtion for Flush failure
     20 Apr 81  JPS   V1.2  Make ReadDisk use its own segment (BufferSegment)
                         (msg: String; operation: DiskCommand; addr: DiskAddr;
                       softStat: integer);
{----------------------------   rather than DiskIO's (DiskSegment).
                            Set the BufferSegment and UnSwappable for virtual
         ----------------------------------------------
  Abstract: Raised when the system is unable to flush out a buffer.  The buffer                   memory.
     14 Apr 81  BAM   V1.1  Fixed ForgetAll to set Flags to false.
     19 Mar 81  BAM   V1.0  Chan
            is marked as flushed out, however, so the error will not repeat
            the next time a buffer needs to be fluged Bit32 to FSBit32.
     17 Mar 81  GGR   V0.1  Changed number of buffers from 4 to 8.
     ?? ??? ??  CMU Spice Group  V0.0shed
  Parameters: Same as DiskFailure (in DiskIO)
  Resume: ALLOWED, but has no effect (procedure will return normally as if  Started
--------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{******************} exports {*****
           flush had been successful)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------}

{******************************}
imports DiskIO from DiskIO;

function  ReadDisk(addr : DiskAddr)     : ptrDiskBuffer;
function  Chan**********} private {***************************}
                                                                              G 	
                           H  	
e; var X: integer );
 procedure ReadString( var F: FileType; var X: String; Max, Len: integer );
 procedure ReadX( var F: Fileguarantees are made as to the accuracy or correctness of the
{       functions.  Validation of the functions must be done, but Type; var X: integer; B: integer );


private
                                                                              at
{       some later date.
{
{ Design:
{       AdX, IntXp, SetXp, and Reduce are implemented as Pascal
{       functions. module RealFunctions;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ RealFunctions - Stan It is clear that replacing the calls with in-line
{       code (perhaps through a macro expansion) would improve the
{       dard functions for reals.
{ J. Strait   27 Nov 81.
{ Copyright (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{
{ Abstract:
{efficiency.
{
{       Many temporary variables are used.  Elimination of unnecessary
{       temporaries would also improve t       RealFunctions implements many of the standard functions whose
{       domain and/or range is the set of real numbers.  The efficiency.
{
{       Many limit constants have been chosen conservatively, thus
{       trading a small loss in range for, 1981.
{ 
{ Abstract:
{       Reader is the character input module of the Stream package.  It is
{       called by code genhe
{       implementation of these functions was guided by the book
{
{       Software Manual for the Elementary Functions,
erated by the Pascal compiler in response to Read
{       or Readln.  It is one level above Module Stream and uses Stream's
{ {       William J. Cody, Jr.  and  William Waite,
{       (C) 1980 by Prentice-Hall, Inc.
{
{       The domain (inputs) and r      lower-level input routines.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ 4 ange (outputs) of the functions are
{       given in their abstract.  The following notation is used.
{       Parentheses () aJun 81  V2.1  John Strait.
{ Add Virgil headers and comments.
{ }

{ 12 May 81  V2.0  John Strait.
{ 1. Use exceptions rathre used for open intervals (those that do not
{       include the endpoints), and brackets [] are used for closed
{       inteer than StreamError.
{ 2. Fix bug in read routines caused by not clearing CharReady.
{ }

exports
 

imports Stream fromrvals (those that do include their endpoints).  The closed
{       interval [RealMLargest, RealPLargest] is used to mean all re Stream;
 
 
 procedure ReadBoolean( var F: FileType; var X: boolean );
 procedure ReadCh( var F: FileType; var X: char; Fieal
{       numbers, and the closed interval [-32768, 32767] is used to
{       mean all integer numbers.
{
{       Currentlyld: integer );
 procedure ReadChArray( var F: FileType; var X: ChArray; Max, Len: integer );
 procedure ReadIdentifier( var F: all functions described by Cody and Waite are
{       implemented with the exception of the hyperbolic functions
{       (Sin FileType; var X: integer;
                           var IT: IdentTable; L: integer );
 procedure ReadInteger( var F: FileTypH, CosH, TanH).
{
{       DISCLAIMER:
{
{       Only the most cursory testing of these functions has been done.
{       No  H 	
                           I  	

{       now are the ones recommended by Cody and Waite.  It seems that
{       Indefinite values (NaNs in the IEEE terminology---------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       SqrtNeg is raised when Sqrt is passed a negative argument.
{  ) might make
{       more sense in some cases.
{
{---------------------------------------------------------------------------     You may resume from this exception, in which case Sqrt returns
{       Sqrt(Abs(X)).
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argume--}

{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Change history:
{
{ 27 Nov 81  V1nt of Sqrt.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception ExpLarge( X: .0  J. Strait
{ Start module.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports
Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ExpLarge is rai

const RealPInfinity =   Recast(#17740000000,Real);   {  1.0 / 0.0 }
      RealMInfinity =   Recast(#37740000000,Real);   { sed when Exp is passed an argument which is too
{       large.  You may resume from this exception, in which case Exp
{       -1.0 / 0.0 }
      RealPIndefinite = Recast(#00000000001,Real);   {  0.0 / 0.0 }
      RealMIndefinite = Recast(#20000000001,Rreturns RealPInfinity.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Exp.
{
{----------------------------------------------------eal);   { -0.0 / 0.0 }
      RealPLargest =    Recast(#17737777777,Real);   { largest positive }
      RealMLargest =    Recas-------------------------}




exception ExpSmall( X: Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------t(#37737777777,Real);   { largest negative }
      RealPSmallest =   Recast(#00040000000,Real);   { smallest positive }
      ------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ExpLarge is raised when Exp is passed an argument which is too
{       small.  You  a guarantee of correctness.
{       The choice of these limits should be re-evaluated by someone
{       with a better undersRealMSmallest =   Recast(#20040000000,Real);   { smallest negative }


function Sqrt( X: Real ): Real;
function Exp( X: Realtanding of the issues.
{
{       Some constants are expressed in decimal (thus losing the
{       guarantee of precision).  O ): Real;
function Ln( X: Real ): Real;
function Log10( X: Real ): Real;
function Power( X, Y: Real ): Real;
function PowerIthers are expressed as Sign,
{       Exponent, and Significand and are formed at execution time.
{       Converting these two ( X: Real; Y: Integer ): Real;
function Sin( X: Real ): Real;
function Cos( X: Real ): Real;
function Tan( X: Real ): Real;
32-bit constants which are Recast into
{       real numbers would improve the correctness and efficiency.
{
{       More thoufunction CoTan( X: Real ): Real;
function ArcSin( X: Real ): Real;
function ArcCos( X: Real ): Real;
function ArcTan( X: Realght needs to be given to the values which are returned
{       after resuming from an exception.  The values that are returned ): Real;
function ArcTan2( Y, X: Real ): Real;




exception SqrtNeg( X: Real );
{-------------------------------------- I 	
                           J  	
-------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       LogSmall is raise when Ln or Log10 



exception PowerBig( X, Y: Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Ais passed an argument which
{       is too small.  You may resume from this exception in which case
{       Ln or Log10 returnbstract:
{       PowerBig is raised when Power or PowerI is called with X and Y
{       for which X raised to the Y power is ts RealMInfinity if X is zero or the log of
{       Abs(X) if X is non-zero.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Ln or Looo large to be represented.
{       You may resume from this exception in which case Power or PowerI
{       returns RealPInfig10.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception PowerZero( X, Y: Reanity.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Power or PowerI.
{       Y - Argument of Power or PowerI.
{
{---------------l );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       PowerZero is raise--------------------------------------------------------------}




exception PowerSmall( X, Y: Real );
{-----------------d when Power or PowerI is called with X = 0.0
{       and Y = 0.0.  You may resume from this exception in which case
{       P------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       PowerSmall is raised when Power or PowerI ower or PowerI returns RealPInfinity.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Power or PowerI.
{       Y - Argument of Poweris called with X and Y
{       for which X raised to the Y is too close to zero to be represented.
{       You may resume from or PowerI.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception PowerNeg( X,  this exception in which case Power or PowerI
{       returns 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Power or PowerI.Y: Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       PowerNeg is 
{       Y - Argument of Power or PowerI.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}
raised when Power is called with X < 0.0 or with
{       X = 0.0 and Y < 0.0, or PowerI is called with X = 0.0 and
{       Y <



exception SinLarge( X: Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abst 0.  You may resume from this exception in which case Power
{       or PowerI returns Power(Abs(X),Y) in the case of X < 0.0 orract:
{       SinLarge is raised when Sin is called with an argument which is
{       too large.  You may resume from this excmay resume from this exception, in which case Exp
{       returns 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Exp.
{
{---
{       returns RealPInfinity in the case of X = 0.0 and Y < 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Power or PowerI.--------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception LogSmall( X: Real );
{----------
{       Y - Argument of Power or PowerI.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}
 J 	
                           K  	
----}




exception ArcCosLarge( X: Real );
{--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------}

exports

procedure SetBaud(Baud: String; Enable: Boolean);

Exception BadBaudRate;
{------------------------eption in which case
{       Sin returns 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Sin.
{
{----------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ArcCosLarge is raised when ArcCos is called with an argument
{       which is too large.  You may res-------------------------------------------------}




exception CosLarge( X: Real );
{-----------------------------------ume from this exception in which
{       case ArcCos returns RealPInfinity.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of ArcCos.------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       CosLarge is raised when Cos is called with an argument which
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception ArcTan2Zero( Y, X: Real ) is
{       too large.  You may resume from this exception in which case
{       Cos returns 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ArcTan2Zero is raised - Argument of Cos.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}




exception TanLa when ArcTan2 is called with both X and Y
{       equal to zero.  You may resume from this exception in which
{       case Arcrge( X: Real );
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       CosLargTan2 returns RealPInfinity.
{
{ Parameters:
{       Y - Argument of ArcTan2.
{       X - Argument of ArcTan2.
{
{---------e is raised when Tan or CoTan is called with an argument
{       which is too large.  You may resume from this exception in whi--------------------------------------------------------------------}




private
                                        ch
{       case Tan or CoTan returns 0.0.
{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of Tan or CoTan.
{
{-----------------------module RS232Baud;
{----------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{
{     RS232Baud -------------------------------------------------------}




exception ArcSinLarge( X: Real );
{--------------------------- set RS232 baud rate with optional input enable.
                  J. P. Strait       21 Aug 80.
                  Copyright (--------------------------------------------------
{
{ Abstract:
{       ArcSinLarge is raised when ArcSin is called with an c) Three Rivers Computer Corporation 1980.
----------------------------------------------------------------------}

{-------argument
{       which is too large.  You may resume from this exception in which
{       case ArcSin returns RealPInfinity.
---------------------------------------------------------------
 Versions
     13-May-81 Brad A. Myers  V1.1  Changed to use e{
{ Parameters:
{       X - Argument of ArcSin.
{
{-------------------------------------------------------------------------xceptions and new IO
     21-Aug-80 John Strait    V1.0  Created
------------------------------------------------------------- K 	
                           L  	
                 var Header: RunInfo;
                       var FirstSeg, FirstUserSeg, LastSeg: pSegNode;
                  Module Screen;
{---------------------------------------------------------------}
{ Perq Screen Driver                              ImportsWanted: Boolean );

procedure ReadSegNames( var RunFile: RunFileType; Seg: Integer;
                        First                   }
{ Written By: Miles A. Barel    July 1, 1980                    }
{             Three Rivers Computer CorUserSeg: pSegNode );


private
                                                                                            poration                 }
{             Pittsburgh, PA 15213                              }
{ Abstract: Provides the interfac e to the PERQ screen including }
{           rudimentary support for multiple windows            }
{------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Abstract: Raised if string is not a valid baud rate
-------------------------- --------------------------------------------}
 
private
                                                                     module RunWrite;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       RunWrite - Module tmodule RunRead;
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
{
{       RunRead - Module to o write run files.
{       John P Strait   9 Apr 81.
{       CopyRight (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{
{ Abstread run files.
{       John P Strait   9 Apr 81.
{       CopyRight (C) Three Rivers Computer Corporation, 1981.
{
{ Abstracract:
{       RunWrite exports procedures to write run files.
{
{ Design:
{       If and when the format of run files is chat:
{       RunRead exports procedures to read and write run files.
{
{ Design:
{       If and when the format of run files inged, the constant
{       RFileFormat in module Code must be changed.  This is necessary
{       so that the procedures to res changed, the constant
{       RFileFormat in module Code must be changed.  This is necessary
{       so that the procedures ad run files will not crap out.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ 21 Jto read run files will not crap out.
{
{-----------------------------------------------------------------------------}


{ul 81  V1.1  John Strait
{ Add Hints.
{ }

{  9 Apr 81  V1.0  John Strait
{ Start file.
{ }

exports


const RunWrit 21 Jul 81  V1.1  John Strait
{ Add Hints.
{ }

{  9 Apr 81  V1.0  John Strait
{ Start file.
{ }

exports


const RueVersion = '1.1';


imports Code from Code;



procedure WriteRunFile( var RunFile: RunFileType; Header: RunInfo;
      nReadVersion = '1.1';


imports Code from Code;



procedure ReadRunFile( var RunFile: RunFileType; Seg: Integer;
                        FirstSeg, FirstUserSeg: pSegNode );

private
                                                              L 	
                          